chore(release): payload/2.19.0 [skip ci]

chore(i18n): This commit enriches the application by integrating Turkish
language support, enhancing accessibility and user experience for
Turkish-speaking audiences. 🇹🇷

Co-authored-by: Elliot DeNolf <denolfe@users.noreply.github.com>

.editorconfig

@@ -23,3 +23,7 @@ indent_size = 2
 [*.json]
 indent_style = space
 indent_size = 2
+
+[*.md]
+indent_style = space
+indent_size = 2

.github/CODEOWNERS

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+# Order matters. The last matching pattern takes precedence.
+
+### Core ###
+
+### Adapters ###
+/packages/richtext-*/ @AlessioGr
+
+### Plugins ###
+/packages/plugin-cloud*/ @denolfe
+
+### Templates ###
+/templates/ @jacobsfletch @denolfe
+
+### Misc ###
+/packages/create-payload-app/ @denolfe
+/packages/eslint-*/ @denolfe
+
+### Build Files ###
+/**/package.json @denolfe
+
+/tsconfig.json @denolfe
+/**/tsconfig*.json @denolfe
+
+/jest.config.js @denolfe
+/**/jest.config.js @denolfe
+
+### Root ###
+/package.json @denolfe
+/scripts/ @denolfe
+/.husky/ @denolfe
+/.vscode/ @denolfe
+/.github/ @denolfe

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/1.bug_report_v3.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+name: Bug Report v3
+description: Create a bug report for Payload v3 (beta)
+labels: ['status: needs-triage', 'v3']
+body:
+  - type: input
+    id: reproduction-link
+    attributes:
+      label: Link to reproduction
+      description: Want us to look into your issue faster? Follow the [reproduction-guide](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/.github/reproduction-guide.md) for more information.
+    validations:
+      required: false
+  - type: input
+    id: version
+    attributes:
+      label: Payload Version
+      description: What version of Payload are you running?
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: input
+    id: node-version
+    attributes:
+      label: Node Version
+      description: What version of Node are you running?
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: input
+    id: nextjs-version
+    attributes:
+      label: Next.js Version
+      description: What version of Next.js are you running?
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: textarea
+    attributes:
+      label: Describe the Bug
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: textarea
+    attributes:
+      label: Reproduction Steps
+      description: Steps to reproduce the behavior, please provide a clear description of how to reproduce the issue, based on the linked minimal reproduction. Screenshots can be provided in the issue body below. If using code blocks, make sure that [syntax highlighting is correct](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/writing-on-github/working-with-advanced-formatting/creating-and-highlighting-code-blocks#syntax-highlighting) and double check that the rendered preview is not broken.
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: input
+    id: adapters-plugins
+    attributes:
+      label: Adapters and Plugins
+      description: What adapters and plugins are you using if relevant? ie. db-mongodb, db-postgres, storage-vercel-blob, etc.
+  - type: markdown
+    attributes:
+      value: Before submitting the issue, go through the steps you've written down to make sure the steps provided are detailed and clear.
+  - type: markdown
+    attributes:
+      value: Contributors should be able to follow the steps provided in order to reproduce the bug.
+  - type: markdown
+    attributes:
+      value: These steps are used to add integration tests to ensure the same issue does not happen again. Thanks in advance!

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/2.bug_report.yml

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 name: Bug Report
 description: Create a bug report for Payload
-labels: ['possible-bug']
+labels: ['status: needs-triage']
 body:
   - type: markdown
     attributes:
@@ -10,7 +10,12 @@ body:
     id: reproduction-link
     attributes:
       label: Link to reproduction
-      description: Please add a link to a reproduction. See the fork [reproduction-guide](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/.github/reproduction-guide.md) for more information.
+      description: Want us to look into your issue faster? Follow the [reproduction-guide](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/.github/reproduction-guide.md) for more information.
+    validations:
+      required: false
+  - type: textarea
+    attributes:
+      label: Describe the Bug
     validations:
       required: true
   - type: textarea
@@ -19,11 +24,6 @@ body:
       description: Steps to reproduce the behavior, please provide a clear description of how to reproduce the issue, based on the linked minimal reproduction. Screenshots can be provided in the issue body below. If using code blocks, make sure that [syntax highlighting is correct](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/writing-on-github/working-with-advanced-formatting/creating-and-highlighting-code-blocks#syntax-highlighting) and double check that the rendered preview is not broken.
     validations:
       required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Describe the Bug
-    validations:
-      required: true
   - type: input
     id: version
     attributes:

.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md

@@ -12,8 +12,8 @@
 - [ ] Bug fix (non-breaking change which fixes an issue)
 - [ ] New feature (non-breaking change which adds functionality)
 - [ ] Breaking change (fix or feature that would cause existing functionality to not work as expected)
-- [ ] Change to the [templates](../templates/) directory (does not affect core functionality)
-- [ ] Change to the [examples](../examples/) directory (does not affect core functionality)
+- [ ] Change to the [templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) directory (does not affect core functionality)
+- [ ] Change to the [examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directory (does not affect core functionality)
 - [ ] This change requires a documentation update
 
 ## Checklist:

.github/reproduction-guide.md

@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
 # Reproduction Guide
 
-1. [fork](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/fork) this repo
-2. run `yarn` to install dependencies
-3. open up the `test/_community` directory
-4. add any necessary `collections/globals/fields` in this directory to recreate the issue you are experiencing
-5. run `yarn dev _community` to start the admin panel
+1. [Fork](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/fork) this repo
+2. Optionally, create a new branch for your reproduction
+3. Run `pnpm install` to install dependencies
+4. Open up the `test/_community` directory
+5. Add any necessary `collections/globals/fields` in this directory to recreate the issue you are experiencing
+6. Run `pnpm dev _community` to start the admin panel
 
 **NOTE:** The goal is to isolate the problem by reducing the number of `collections/globals/fields` you add to the `test/_community` folder. This folder is _not_ meant for you to copy your project into, but rather recreate the issue you are experiencing with minimal config.
 
@@ -21,7 +22,7 @@
 - `config.ts` - This is the _granular_ Payload config for testing. It should be as lightweight as possible. Reference existing configs for an example
 - `int.spec.ts` [Optional] - This is the test file run by jest. Any test file must have a `*int.spec.ts` suffix.
 - `e2e.spec.ts` [Optional] - This is the end-to-end test file that will load up the admin UI using the above config and run Playwright tests.
-- `payload-types.ts` - Generated types from `config.ts`. Generate this file by running `yarn dev:generate-types _community`.
+- `payload-types.ts` - Generated types from `config.ts`. Generate this file by running `pnpm dev:generate-types _community`.
 
 The directory split up in this way specifically to reduce friction when creating tests and to add the ability to boot up Payload with that specific config. You should modify the files in `test/_community` to get started.
 
@@ -44,7 +45,7 @@ There are a couple ways run integration tests:
 - **Manually** - you can run all int tests in the `/test/_community/int.spec.ts` file by running the following command:
 
   ```bash
-  yarn test:int _community
+  pnpm test:int _community
   ```
 
 ### Running E2E tests (Admin Panel UI tests)
@@ -60,4 +61,4 @@ Once they are installed you can open the `testing` tab in vscode sidebar and dri
 
 #### Notes
 
-- It is recommended to add the test credentials (located in `test/credentials.ts`) to your autofill for `localhost:3000/admin` as this will be required on every nodemon restart. The default credentials are `dev@payloadcms.com` as email and `test` as password.
+The default credentials are `dev@payloadcms.com` as email and `test` as password. They can be found in `test/credentials.ts`. By default, these will be autofilled, so no log-in is required.

.github/workflows/label-author.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+name: label-author
+
+on:
+  pull_request:
+    types: [opened]
+  issues:
+    types: [opened]
+
+permissions:
+  contents: read
+  pull-requests: write
+  issues: write
+
+jobs:
+  debug-context:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: View context attributes
+        uses: actions/github-script@v7
+        with:
+          script: console.log(context)
+
+  label-created-by:
+    name: Label pr/issue on opening
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Tag with 'created-by'
+        uses: actions/github-script@v7
+        if: github.event.action == 'opened'
+        with:
+          github-token: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+          script: |
+            const payloadTeamUsernames = [
+              'denolfe',
+              'jmikrut',
+              'DanRibbens',
+              'jacobsfletch',
+              'JarrodMFlesch',
+              'AlessioGr',
+              'JessChowdhury',
+              'kendelljoseph',
+              'PatrikKozak',
+              'tylandavis',
+              'paulpopus',
+            ];
+
+            const type = context.payload.pull_request ? 'pull_request' : 'issue';
+
+            const isTeamMember = payloadTeamUsernames
+              .map(n => n.toLowerCase())
+              .includes(context.payload[type].user.login.toLowerCase());
+
+            if (isTeamMember) {
+              github.rest.issues.addLabels({
+                issue_number: context.issue.number,
+                owner: context.repo.owner,
+                repo: context.repo.repo,
+                labels: ['created-by: Payload team'],
+              });
+              console.log(`Added 'created-by: Payload team' label`);
+              return;
+            }
+
+            const association = context.payload[type].author_association;
+            let label = ''
+            if (association === 'MEMBER' || association === 'OWNER') {
+              label = 'created-by: Payload team';
+            } else if (association === 'CONTRIBUTOR') {
+              label = 'created-by: Contributor';
+            }
+
+            if (!label) return;
+
+            github.rest.issues.addLabels({
+              issue_number: context.issue.number,
+              owner: context.repo.owner,
+              repo: context.repo.repo,
+              labels: [label],
+            });
+            console.log(`Added '${label}' label.`);

.github/workflows/label-on-change.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+name: label-on-change
+
+on:
+  # https://docs.github.com/en/actions/using-workflows/events-that-trigger-workflows#pull_request_target
+  issues:
+    types:
+      - assigned
+      - closed
+      - labeled
+      - reopened
+
+  # TODO: Handle labeling on comment
+
+jobs:
+  on-labeled-ensure-one-status:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    permissions:
+      issues: write
+    # Only run on issue labeled and if label starts with 'status:'
+    if: github.event.action == 'labeled' && startsWith(github.event.label.name, 'status:')
+    steps:
+      - name: Ensure only one status label
+        uses: actions/github-script@v7
+        with:
+          github-token: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+          script: |
+            // Get all labels that start with 'status:' and are not the incoming label
+            const incomingLabelName = context.payload.label.name;
+            const labelNamesToRemove = context.payload.issue.labels
+              .filter(label => label.name.startsWith('status:') && label.name !== incomingLabelName)
+              .map(label => label.name);
+
+            if (!labelNamesToRemove.length) {
+              console.log('No labels to remove');
+              return;
+            }
+
+            console.log(`Labels to remove: '${labelNamesToRemove}'`);
+
+            // If there is more than one status label, remove all but the incoming label
+            for (const labelName of labelNamesToRemove) {
+              await github.rest.issues.removeLabel({
+                issue_number: context.issue.number,
+                name: labelName,
+                owner: context.repo.owner,
+                repo: context.repo.repo,
+              });
+              console.log(`Removed '${labelName}' label`);
+            }
+
+  on-issue-close:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    permissions:
+      issues: write
+    if: github.event.action == 'closed'
+    steps:
+      - name: Remove all labels on issue close
+        uses: actions/github-script@v7
+        with:
+          github-token: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+          script: |
+            // Get all labels that start with 'status:' and 'stale'
+            const labelNamesToRemove = context.payload.issue.labels
+              .filter(label => label.name.startsWith('status:') || label.name === 'stale')
+              .map(label => label.name);
+
+            if (!labelNamesToRemove.length) {
+              console.log('No labels to remove');
+              return;
+            }
+
+            console.log(`Labels to remove: '${labelNamesToRemove}'`);
+
+            for (const labelName of labelNamesToRemove) {
+              await github.rest.issues.removeLabel({
+                issue_number: context.issue.number,
+                name: labelName,
+                owner: context.repo.owner,
+                repo: context.repo.repo,
+              });
+              console.log(`Removed '${labelName}' label`);
+            }
+
+  on-issue-reopen:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    permissions:
+      issues: write
+    if: github.event.action == 'reopened'
+    steps:
+      - name: Add needs-triage label on issue reopen
+        uses: actions-ecosystem/action-add-labels@v1
+        with:
+          labels: 'status: needs-triage'
+
+  on-issue-assigned:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    permissions:
+      issues: write
+    if: >
+      github.event.action == 'assigned' &&
+      contains(github.event.issue.labels.*.name, 'status: needs-triage')
+    steps:
+      - name: Remove needs-triage label on issue assign
+        uses: actions-ecosystem/action-remove-labels@v1
+        with:
+          labels: 'status: needs-triage'
+
+  # on-pr-merge:
+  #   runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+  #   if: github.event.pull_request.merged == true
+  #   steps:
+
+  # on-pr-close:
+  #   runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+  #   if: github.event_name == 'pull_request_target' && github.event.pull_request.merged == false
+  #   steps:

.github/workflows/main.yml

@@ -2,12 +2,46 @@ name: build
 
 on:
   pull_request:
-    types: [opened, reopened, synchronize]
+    types: [ opened, reopened, synchronize ]
   push:
-    branches: ['main']
+    branches: [ 'main' ]
 
 jobs:
+  changes:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    permissions:
+      pull-requests: read
+    outputs:
+      needs_build: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.needs_build }}
+      templates: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.templates }}
+    steps:
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 25
+      - uses: dorny/paths-filter@v2
+        id: filter
+        with:
+          filters: |
+            needs_build:
+              - '.github/workflows/**'
+              - 'packages/**'
+              - 'test/**'
+              - 'pnpm-lock.yaml'
+              - 'package.json'
+            templates:
+              - 'templates/**'
+      - name: Log all filter results
+        run: |
+          echo "needs_build: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.needs_build }}"
+          echo "templates: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.templates }}"
+
   core-build:
+    needs: changes
+    if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.needs_build == 'true' }}
     runs-on: ubuntu-latest
 
     steps:
@@ -15,13 +49,17 @@ jobs:
         with:
           fetch-depth: 25
 
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
-        uses: actions/setup-node@v3
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Use Node.js 20
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: 20
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v2
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
           version: 8
           run_install: false
@@ -31,7 +69,7 @@ jobs:
         run: |
           echo "STORE_PATH=$(pnpm store path --silent)" >> $GITHUB_ENV
 
-      - uses: actions/cache@v3
+      - uses: actions/cache@v4
         name: Setup pnpm cache
         with:
           path: ${{ env.STORE_PATH }}
@@ -44,7 +82,7 @@ jobs:
       - run: pnpm run build
 
       - name: Cache build
-        uses: actions/cache@v3
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
@@ -55,30 +93,41 @@ jobs:
     strategy:
       fail-fast: false
       matrix:
-        database: [mongoose, postgres]
+        database: [mongoose, postgres, postgres-custom-schema, postgres-uuid, supabase]
     env:
       POSTGRES_USER: postgres
       POSTGRES_PASSWORD: postgres
       POSTGRES_DB: payloadtests
+      AWS_ENDPOINT_URL: http://127.0.0.1:4566
+      AWS_ACCESS_KEY_ID: localstack
+      AWS_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY: localstack
+      AWS_REGION: us-east-1
 
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
-        uses: actions/setup-node@v3
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Use Node.js 20
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: 20
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v2
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
           version: 8
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
-        uses: actions/cache@v3
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
 
+      - name: Start LocalStack
+        run: pnpm docker:start
+
       - name: Start PostgreSQL
         uses: CasperWA/postgresql-action@v1.2
         with:
@@ -86,15 +135,40 @@ jobs:
           postgresql db: ${{ env.POSTGRES_DB }}
           postgresql user: ${{ env.POSTGRES_USER }}
           postgresql password: ${{ env.POSTGRES_PASSWORD }}
-        if: matrix.database == 'postgres'
+        if: startsWith(matrix.database, 'postgres')
+
+      - name: Install Supabase CLI
+        uses: supabase/setup-cli@v1
+        with:
+          version: latest
+        if: matrix.database == 'supabase'
+
+      - name: Initialize Supabase
+        run: |
+          supabase init
+          supabase start
+        if: matrix.database == 'supabase'
+
+      - name: Wait for PostgreSQL
+        run: sleep 30
+        if: startsWith(matrix.database, 'postgres')
 
-      - run: sleep 30
       - name: Configure PostgreSQL
         run: |
           psql "postgresql://$POSTGRES_USER:$POSTGRES_PASSWORD@localhost:5432/$POSTGRES_DB" -c "CREATE ROLE runner SUPERUSER LOGIN;"
           psql "postgresql://$POSTGRES_USER:$POSTGRES_PASSWORD@localhost:5432/$POSTGRES_DB" -c "SELECT version();"
           echo "POSTGRES_URL=postgresql://$POSTGRES_USER:$POSTGRES_PASSWORD@localhost:5432/$POSTGRES_DB" >> $GITHUB_ENV
-        if: matrix.database == 'postgres'
+        if: startsWith(matrix.database, 'postgres')
+
+      - name: Configure PostgreSQL with custom schema
+        run: |
+          psql "postgresql://$POSTGRES_USER:$POSTGRES_PASSWORD@localhost:5432/$POSTGRES_DB" -c "CREATE SCHEMA custom;"
+        if: matrix.database == 'postgres-custom-schema'
+
+      - name: Configure Supabase
+        run: |
+          echo "POSTGRES_URL=postgresql://postgres:postgres@127.0.0.1:54322/postgres" >> $GITHUB_ENV
+        if: matrix.database == 'supabase'
 
       - name: Component Tests
         run: pnpm test:components
@@ -102,6 +176,7 @@ jobs:
       - name: Integration Tests
         run: pnpm test:int
         env:
+          NODE_OPTIONS: --max-old-space-size=8096
           PAYLOAD_DATABASE: ${{ matrix.database }}
           POSTGRES_URL: ${{ env.POSTGRES_URL }}
 
@@ -111,28 +186,37 @@ jobs:
     strategy:
       fail-fast: false
       matrix:
-        part: [1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4]
+        part: [ 1/8, 2/8, 3/8, 4/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8 ]
 
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
-        uses: actions/setup-node@v3
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Use Node.js 20
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: 20
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v2
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
           version: 8
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
-        uses: actions/cache@v3
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
 
       - name: E2E Tests
-        run: pnpm test:e2e --part ${{ matrix.part }} --bail
+        uses: nick-fields/retry@v2
+        with:
+          retry_on: error
+          max_attempts: 2
+          timeout_minutes: 15
+          command: pnpm test:e2e --part ${{ matrix.part }} --bail
 
       - uses: actions/upload-artifact@v3
         if: always()
@@ -146,19 +230,23 @@ jobs:
     needs: core-build
 
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
-        uses: actions/setup-node@v3
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Use Node.js 20
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: 20
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v2
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
           version: 8
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
-        uses: actions/cache@v3
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
@@ -186,19 +274,23 @@ jobs:
           - live-preview-react
 
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
-        uses: actions/setup-node@v3
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Use Node.js 20
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: 20
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v2
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
           version: 8
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
-        uses: actions/cache@v3
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
@@ -213,23 +305,33 @@ jobs:
       fail-fast: false
       matrix:
         pkg:
-          - plugin-cloud
           - create-payload-app
+          - plugin-cloud
+          - plugin-cloud-storage
+          - plugin-form-builder
+          - plugin-nested-docs
+          - plugin-search
+          - plugin-sentry
+          - plugin-seo
 
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
-        uses: actions/setup-node@v3
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Use Node.js 20
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: 20
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v2
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
           version: 8
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
-        uses: actions/cache@v3
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
         with:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
@@ -240,3 +342,39 @@ jobs:
       - name: Test ${{ matrix.pkg }}
         run: pnpm --filter ${{ matrix.pkg }} run test
         if: matrix.pkg != 'create-payload-app' # degit doesn't work within GitHub Actions
+
+  templates:
+    needs: changes
+    if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.templates == 'true' }}
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    strategy:
+      fail-fast: false
+      matrix:
+        template: [ blank, website, ecommerce ]
+
+    steps:
+      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 25
+
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Use Node.js 20
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
+        with:
+          node-version: 20
+
+      - name: Start MongoDB
+        uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.10.0
+        with:
+          mongodb-version: 6.0
+
+      - name: Build Template
+        run: |
+          cd templates/${{ matrix.template }}
+          cp .env.example .env
+          yarn install
+          yarn build
+          yarn generate:types

.github/workflows/release-canary.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+name: release-canary
+
+on:
+  workflow_dispatch:
+
+jobs:
+  test:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Echo
+        run: echo "Register release-canary workflow"

.github/workflows/stale.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+name: stale
+
+on:
+  workflow_dispatch:
+
+jobs:
+  stale:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    permissions:
+      issues: write
+      pull-requests: write
+    steps:
+      - uses: actions/stale@v9
+        id: stale
+        with:
+          debug-only: true
+          days-before-stale: 90
+          days-before-close: 7
+          ascending: true
+          operations-per-run: 300
+
+          # Ignore all assigned
+          exempt-all-assignees: false
+
+          # Issues
+          stale-issue-label: 'stale'
+          exempt-issue-labels: 'blocked,must,should,keep,created-by: Payload team,created-by: Contributor'
+          stale-issue-message: >
+            This issue has been marked as stale due to lack of activity. To keep the ticket open, please indicate that it is still relevant in a comment below.
+          close-issue-message: >
+            This issue was automatically closed due to lack of activity.
+
+          # Pull Requests
+          stale-pr-label: 'stale'
+          exempt-pr-labels: 'blocked,must,should,keep,created-by: Payload team,created-by: Contributor'
+          stale-pr-message: >
+            This PR is stale due to lack of activity. To keep the PR open, please indicate that it is still relevant in a comment below.
+          close-pr-message: >
+            This pull request was automatically closed due to lack of activity.
+
+      - name: Print outputs
+        run: echo ${{ format('{0},{1}', toJSON(steps.stale.outputs.staled-issues-prs), toJSON(steps.stale.outputs.closed-issues-prs)) }}

.gitignore

@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
 coverage
 package-lock.json
 dist
-.idea
+/.idea/*
+!/.idea/runConfigurations
+
 test-results
 .devcontainer
+.localstack
 /migrations
+.localstack
 
 # Created by https://www.toptal.com/developers/gitignore/api/node,macos,windows,webstorm,sublimetext,visualstudiocode
 # Edit at https://www.toptal.com/developers/gitignore?templates=node,macos,windows,webstorm,sublimetext,visualstudiocode
@@ -230,119 +234,24 @@ GitHub.sublime-settings
 .history
 .ionide
 
-### WebStorm ###
-# Covers JetBrains IDEs: IntelliJ, RubyMine, PhpStorm, AppCode, PyCharm, CLion, Android Studio, WebStorm and Rider
-# Reference: https://intellij-support.jetbrains.com/hc/en-us/articles/206544839
-
-# User-specific stuff
-.idea/**/workspace.xml
-.idea/**/tasks.xml
-.idea/**/usage.statistics.xml
-.idea/**/dictionaries
-.idea/**/shelf
-
-# AWS User-specific
-.idea/**/aws.xml
-
-# Generated files
-.idea/**/contentModel.xml
-
-# Sensitive or high-churn files
-.idea/**/dataSources/
-.idea/**/dataSources.ids
-.idea/**/dataSources.local.xml
-.idea/**/sqlDataSources.xml
-.idea/**/dynamic.xml
-.idea/**/uiDesigner.xml
-.idea/**/dbnavigator.xml
-
-# Gradle
-.idea/**/gradle.xml
-.idea/**/libraries
-
-# Gradle and Maven with auto-import
-# When using Gradle or Maven with auto-import, you should exclude module files,
-# since they will be recreated, and may cause churn.  Uncomment if using
-# auto-import.
-# .idea/artifacts
-# .idea/compiler.xml
-# .idea/jarRepositories.xml
-# .idea/modules.xml
-# .idea/*.iml
-# .idea/modules
-# *.iml
-# *.ipr
-
 # CMake
 cmake-build-*/
 
-# Mongo Explorer plugin
-.idea/**/mongoSettings.xml
-
 # File-based project format
 *.iws
 
 # IntelliJ
 out/
 
-# mpeltonen/sbt-idea plugin
-.idea_modules/
-
 # JIRA plugin
 atlassian-ide-plugin.xml
 
-# Cursive Clojure plugin
-.idea/replstate.xml
-
-# SonarLint plugin
-.idea/sonarlint/
-
 # Crashlytics plugin (for Android Studio and IntelliJ)
 com_crashlytics_export_strings.xml
 crashlytics.properties
 crashlytics-build.properties
 fabric.properties
 
-# Editor-based Rest Client
-.idea/httpRequests
-
-# Android studio 3.1+ serialized cache file
-.idea/caches/build_file_checksums.ser
-
-### WebStorm Patch ###
-# Comment Reason: https://github.com/joeblau/gitignore.io/issues/186#issuecomment-215987721
-
-# *.iml
-# modules.xml
-# .idea/misc.xml
-# *.ipr
-
-# Sonarlint plugin
-# https://plugins.jetbrains.com/plugin/7973-sonarlint
-.idea/**/sonarlint/
-
-# SonarQube Plugin
-# https://plugins.jetbrains.com/plugin/7238-sonarqube-community-plugin
-.idea/**/sonarIssues.xml
-
-# Markdown Navigator plugin
-# https://plugins.jetbrains.com/plugin/7896-markdown-navigator-enhanced
-.idea/**/markdown-navigator.xml
-.idea/**/markdown-navigator-enh.xml
-.idea/**/markdown-navigator/
-
-# Cache file creation bug
-# See https://youtrack.jetbrains.com/issue/JBR-2257
-.idea/$CACHE_FILE$
-
-# CodeStream plugin
-# https://plugins.jetbrains.com/plugin/12206-codestream
-.idea/codestream.xml
-
-# Azure Toolkit for IntelliJ plugin
-# https://plugins.jetbrains.com/plugin/8053-azure-toolkit-for-intellij
-.idea/**/azureSettings.xml
-
 ### Windows ###
 # Windows thumbnail cache files
 Thumbs.db
@@ -371,4 +280,4 @@ $RECYCLE.BIN/
 
 # End of https://www.toptal.com/developers/gitignore/api/node,macos,windows,webstorm,sublimetext,visualstudiocode
 
-/build
+/build

.idea/runConfigurations/Run_Dev_Fields.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+<component name="ProjectRunConfigurationManager">
+  <configuration default="false" name="Run Dev Fields" type="NodeJSConfigurationType" application-parameters="fields" path-to-js-file="node_modules/.pnpm/nodemon@3.0.3/node_modules/nodemon/bin/nodemon.js" working-dir="$PROJECT_DIR$">
+    <method v="2" />
+  </configuration>
+</component>

.idea/runConfigurations/Run_Dev__community.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+<component name="ProjectRunConfigurationManager">
+  <configuration default="false" name="Run Dev _community" type="NodeJSConfigurationType" application-parameters="_community" path-to-js-file="node_modules/.pnpm/nodemon@3.0.3/node_modules/nodemon/bin/nodemon.js" working-dir="$PROJECT_DIR$">
+    <method v="2" />
+  </configuration>
+</component>

.release-it.json

@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-{
-  "verbose": true,
-  "git": {
-    "commitMessage": "chore(release): v${version}",
-    "requireCleanWorkingDir": true
-  },
-  "github": {
-    "release": true
-  },
-  "npm": {
-    "skipChecks": true
-  },
-  "hooks": {
-    "before:init": ["pnpm i", "pnpm clean", "pnpm test"]
-  },
-  "plugins": {
-    "@release-it/conventional-changelog": {
-      "preset": "angular",
-      "infile": "CHANGELOG.md"
-    }
-  }
-}

.release-it.pre.js

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+module.exports = {
+  verbose: true,
+  git: {
+    requireCleanWorkingDir: false,
+    commit: false,
+    push: false,
+    tag: false,
+  },
+  npm: {
+    skipChecks: true,
+    tag: 'beta',
+  },
+  hooks: {
+    'before:init': ['pnpm install', 'pnpm clean', 'pnpm build'],
+  },
+}

.release-it.pre.json

@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-{
-  "verbose": true,
-  "git": {
-    "requireCleanWorkingDir": false,
-    "commit": false,
-    "push": false,
-    "tag": false
-  },
-  "github": {
-    "release": true
-  },
-  "npm": {
-    "skipChecks": true,
-    "tag": "canary"
-  },
-  "hooks": {
-    "before:init": ["pnpm i", "pnpm clean", "pnpm test"]
-  },
-  "plugins": {
-    "@release-it/conventional-changelog": {
-      "preset": "angular",
-      "infile": "CHANGELOG.md"
-    }
-  }
-}

.vscode/launch.json

@@ -9,6 +9,23 @@
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
+    {
+      "command": "pnpm run dev plugin-cloud-storage",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev - plugin-cloud-storage",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal",
+      "env": {
+        "PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_CLOUD_STORAGE_ADAPTER": "s3"
+      }
+    },
+    {
+      "command": "pnpm run dev collections-graphql",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev GraphQL",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
     {
       "command": "pnpm run dev fields",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
@@ -30,6 +47,20 @@
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
+    {
+      "command": "pnpm run dev localization",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev Localization",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
+    {
+      "command": "pnpm run dev uploads",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev Uploads",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
     {
       "command": "PAYLOAD_BUNDLER=vite pnpm run dev fields",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
@@ -40,6 +71,20 @@
         "NODE_ENV": "production"
       }
     },
+    {
+      "command": "pnpm run test:int live-preview",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Live Preview Int Tests",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
+    {
+      "command": "pnpm run test:int plugin-search",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Search Plugin Int Tests",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
     {
       "command": "ts-node ./packages/payload/src/bin/index.ts build",
       "env": {

.vscode/settings.json

@@ -5,21 +5,21 @@
     "editor.defaultFormatter": "esbenp.prettier-vscode",
     "editor.formatOnSave": true,
     "editor.codeActionsOnSave": {
-      "source.fixAll.eslint": true
+      "source.fixAll.eslint": "explicit"
     }
   },
   "[typescriptreact]": {
     "editor.defaultFormatter": "esbenp.prettier-vscode",
     "editor.formatOnSave": true,
     "editor.codeActionsOnSave": {
-      "source.fixAll.eslint": true
+      "source.fixAll.eslint": "explicit"
     }
   },
   "[javascript]": {
     "editor.defaultFormatter": "esbenp.prettier-vscode",
     "editor.formatOnSave": true,
     "editor.codeActionsOnSave": {
-      "source.fixAll.eslint": true
+      "source.fixAll.eslint": "explicit"
     }
   },
   "[json]": {

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ If you find a vulnerability within the core Payload repository, and we determine
 
 ## Documentation edits
 
-Payload documentation can be found directly within its codebase and you can feel free to make changes / improvements to any of it through opening a PR. We utilize these files directly in our website and will periodically deploy documentation updates as necessary.
+Payload documentation can be found directly within its codebase, and you can feel free to make changes / improvements to any of it through opening a PR. We utilize these files directly in our website and will periodically deploy documentation updates as necessary.
 
 ## Building additional features
 
@@ -30,9 +30,17 @@ Our design review ensures that proposed changes fit seamlessly with other compon
 
 To help us work on new features, you can create a new feature request post in [GitHub Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or discuss it in our [Discord](https://discord.com/invite/payload). New functionality often has large implications across the entire Payload repo, so it is best to discuss the architecture and approach before starting work on a pull request.
 
+### Installation & Requirements
+
+Payload is structured as a Monorepo, encompassing not only the core Payload platform but also various plugins and packages. To install all required dependencies, you have to run `pnpm install` once in the root directory. **PNPM IS REQUIRED!** Yarn or npm will not work - you will have to use pnpm to develop in the core repository. In most systems, the easiest way to install pnpm is to run `corepack enable` in your terminal.
+
+If you're coming from a very outdated version of payload, it is recommended to nuke the node_modules folder before running pnpm install. On UNIX systems, you can easily do that using the `pnpm clean:unix` command, which will delete all node_modules folders and build artefacts.
+
+It is also recommended to use at least Node v18 or higher. You can check your current node version by typing `node --version` in your terminal. The easiest way to switch between different node versions is to use [nvm](https://github.com/nvm-sh/nvm#intro).
+
 ### Code
 
-Most new functionality should keep testing in mind. With 1.0, testability of new features has been vastly improved. All top-level directories within the `test/` directory are for testing a specific category: `fields`, `collections`, etc.
+Most new functionality should keep testing in mind. All top-level directories within the `test/` directory are for testing a specific category: `fields`, `collections`, etc.
 
 If it makes sense to add your feature to an existing test directory, please do so.
 
@@ -49,21 +57,35 @@ A typical directory with `test/` will be structured like this:
 - `config.ts` - This is the _granular_ Payload config for testing. It should be as lightweight as possible. Reference existing configs for an example
 - `int.spec.ts` - This is the test file run by jest. Any test file must have a `*int.spec.ts` suffix.
 - `e2e.spec.ts` - This is the end-to-end test file that will load up the admin UI using the above config and run Playwright tests. These tests are typically only needed if a large change is being made to the Admin UI.
-- `payload-types.ts` - Generated types from `config.ts`. Generate this file by running `pnpm dev:generate-types my-test-dir`.
+- `payload-types.ts` - Generated types from `config.ts`. Generate this file by running `pnpm dev:generate-types my-test-dir`. Replace `my-test-dir` with the name of your testing directory.
 
-The directory split up in this way specifically to reduce friction when creating tests and to add the ability to boot up Payload with that specific config.
+Each test directory is split up in this way specifically to reduce friction when creating tests and to add the ability to boot up Payload with that specific config.
 
-The following command will start Payload with your config: `pnpm dev my-test-dir`. This command will start up Payload using your config and refresh a test database on every restart.
+The following command will start Payload with your config: `pnpm dev my-test-dir`. Example: `pnpm dev fields` for the test/`fields` test suite. This command will start up Payload using your config and refresh a test database on every restart. If you're using VS Code, the most common run configs are automatically added to your editor - you should be able to find them in your VS Code launch tab.
 
-By default, it will automatically log you in with the default credentials. To disable that, you can either pass in the --no-auto-login flag (example: `pnpm dev my-test-dir --no-auto-login`) or set the `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_DISABLE_AUTO_LOGIN` environment variable to `false`.
+By default, payload will [automatically log you in](https://payloadcms.com/docs/authentication/config#admin-autologin) with the default credentials. To disable that, you can either pass in the --no-auto-login flag (example: `pnpm dev my-test-dir --no-auto-login`) or set the `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_DISABLE_AUTO_LOGIN` environment variable to `false`.
 
-If you wish to use to your own Mongo database for the `test` directory instead of using the in memory database, all you need to do is add the following env vars to the `test/dev.ts` file:
+The default credentials are `dev@payloadcms.com` as E-Mail and `test` as password. These are used in the auto-login.
+
+### Testing with your own MongoDB database
+
+If you wish to use your own MongoDB database for the `test` directory instead of using the in memory database, all you need to do is add the following env vars to the `test/dev.ts` file:
 
 - `process.env.NODE_ENV`
 - `process.env.PAYLOAD_TEST_MONGO_URL`
-- Simply set `process.env.NODE_ENV` to `test` and set `process.env.PAYLOAD_TEST_MONGO_URL` to your mongo url e.g. `mongodb://127.0.0.1/your-test-db`.
+- Simply set `process.env.NODE_ENV` to `test` and set `process.env.PAYLOAD_TEST_MONGO_URL` to your MongoDB URL e.g. `mongodb://127.0.0.1/your-test-db`.
 
-NOTE: It is recommended to add the test credentials (located in `test/credentials.ts`) to your autofill for `localhost:3000/admin` as this will be required on every nodemon restart. The default credentials are `dev@payloadcms.com` as E-Mail and `test` as password.
+### Using Postgres
+
+If you have postgres installed on your system, you can also run the test suites using postgres. By default, mongodb is used.
+
+To do that, simply set the `PAYLOAD_DATABASE` environment variable to `postgres`.
+
+### Running the e2e and int tests
+
+You can run the entire test suite using `pnpm test`. If you wish to only run e2e tests, you can use `pnpm test:e2e`. If you wish to only run int tests, you can use `pnpm test:int`.
+
+By default, `pnpm test:int` will only run int test against MongoDB. To run int tests against postgres, you can use `pnpm test:int:postgres`. You will have to have postgres installed on your system for this to work.
 
 ### Commits
 
@@ -89,3 +111,14 @@ If you are committing to [templates](./templates) or [examples](./examples), use
 ## Pull Requests
 
 For all Pull Requests, you should be extremely descriptive about both your problem and proposed solution. If there are any affected open or closed issues, please leave the issue number in your PR message.
+
+## Previewing docs
+
+This is how you can preview changes you made locally to the docs:
+
+1. Clone our [website repository](https://github.com/payloadcms/website)
+2. Run `yarn install`
+3. Duplicate the `.env.example` file and rename it to `.env`
+4. Add a `DOCS_DIR` environment variable to the `.env` file which points to the absolute path of your modified docs folder. For example `DOCS_DIR=/Users/yourname/Documents/GitHub/payload/docs`
+5. Run `yarn run fetchDocs:local`. If this was successful, you should see no error messages and the following output: *Docs successfully written to /.../website/src/app/docs.json*. There could be error messages if you have incorrect markdown in your local docs folder. In this case, it will tell you how you can fix it
+6. You're done! Now you can start the website locally using `yarn run dev` and preview the docs under [http://localhost:3000/docs/](http://localhost:3000/docs/)

README.md

@@ -1,24 +1,14 @@
-<a href="https://payloadcms.com">
-  <img width="100%" src="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/assets/images/github-banner-alt.jpg?raw=true" alt="Payload headless CMS Admin panel built with React" />
-</a>
+<a href="https://payloadcms.com"><img width="100%" src="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/assets/images/github-banner-alt.jpg?raw=true" alt="Payload headless CMS Admin panel built with React" /></a>
 <br />
 <br />
 <p align="left">
-  <a href="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/actions">
-    <img alt="GitHub Workflow Status" src="https://img.shields.io/github/actions/workflow/status/payloadcms/payload/main.yml?style=flat-square">
-  </a>
+  <a href="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/actions"><img alt="GitHub Workflow Status" src="https://img.shields.io/github/actions/workflow/status/payloadcms/payload/main.yml?style=flat-square"></a>
   &nbsp;
-  <a href="https://discord.gg/payload">
-    <img alt="Discord" src="https://img.shields.io/discord/967097582721572934?label=Discord&color=7289da&style=flat-square" />
-  </a>
+  <a href="https://discord.gg/payload"><img alt="Discord" src="https://img.shields.io/discord/967097582721572934?label=Discord&color=7289da&style=flat-square" /></a>
   &nbsp;
-  <a href="https://www.npmjs.com/package/payload">
-    <img alt="npm" src="https://img.shields.io/npm/v/payload?style=flat-square" />
-  </a>
+  <a href="https://www.npmjs.com/package/payload"><img alt="npm" src="https://img.shields.io/npm/v/payload?style=flat-square" /></a>
   &nbsp;
-  <a href="https://twitter.com/payloadcms">
-    <img src="https://img.shields.io/badge/follow-payloadcms-1DA1F2?logo=twitter&style=flat-square" alt="Payload Twitter" />
-  </a>
+  <a href="https://twitter.com/payloadcms"><img src="https://img.shields.io/badge/follow-payloadcms-1DA1F2?logo=twitter&style=flat-square" alt="Payload Twitter" /></a>
 </p>
 <hr/>
 <h4>
@@ -27,7 +17,7 @@
 <hr/>
 
 > [!IMPORTANT]
-> 🎉 <strong>Payload 2.0 is now available!<strong> Read more in the <a target="_blank" href="https://payloadcms.com/blog/payload-2-0" rel="dofollow"><strong>announcement post</strong></a>.
+> 🎉 <strong>Payload 3.0 beta released!</strong> You can now deploy Payload fully in any Next.js app folder. Read more in the <a target="_blank" href="https://payloadcms.com/blog/30-beta-install-payload-into-any-nextjs-app-with-one-line" rel="dofollow"><strong>announcement post</strong></a>.
 
 <h3>Benefits over a regular CMS</h3>
 <ul>
@@ -51,7 +41,7 @@ Create a cloud account, connect your GitHub, and [deploy in minutes](https://pay
 Before beginning to work with Payload, make sure you have all of the [required software](https://payloadcms.com/docs/getting-started/installation).
 
 ```text
-npx create-payload-app
+npx create-payload-app@latest
 ```
 
 Alternatively, it only takes about five minutes to [create an app from scratch](https://payloadcms.com/docs/getting-started/installation#from-scratch).

changelog.config.js

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+module.exports = {
+  // gitRawCommitsOpts: {
+  //   from: 'v2.0.9',
+  //   path: 'packages/payload',
+  // },
+  // infile: 'CHANGELOG.md',
+  options: {
+    preset: {
+      name: 'conventionalcommits',
+      types: [
+        { section: 'Features', type: 'feat' },
+        { section: 'Features', type: 'feature' },
+        { section: 'Bug Fixes', type: 'fix' },
+        { section: 'Documentation', type: 'docs' },
+      ],
+    },
+  },
+  // outfile: 'NEW.md',
+  writerOpts: {
+    commitGroupsSort: (a, b) => {
+      const groupOrder = ['Features', 'Bug Fixes', 'Documentation']
+      return groupOrder.indexOf(a.title) - groupOrder.indexOf(b.title)
+    },
+
+    // Scoped commits at the end, alphabetical sort
+    commitsSort: (a, b) => {
+      if (a.scope || b.scope) {
+        if (!a.scope) return -1
+        if (!b.scope) return 1
+        return a.scope === b.scope
+          ? a.subject.localeCompare(b.subject)
+          : a.scope.localeCompare(b.scope)
+      }
+
+      // Alphabetical sort
+      return a.subject.localeCompare(b.subject)
+    },
+  },
+}

docs/admin/components.mdx

@@ -27,14 +27,15 @@ You can override a set of admin panel-wide components by providing a component t
 | **`BeforeNavLinks`**  | Array of components to inject into the built-in Nav, _before_ the links themselves.                                                                                                                         |
 | **`AfterNavLinks`**   | Array of components to inject into the built-in Nav, _after_ the links.                                                                                                                                     |
 | **`BeforeDashboard`** | Array of components to inject into the built-in Dashboard, _before_ the default dashboard contents.                                                                                                         |
-| **`AfterDashboard`**  | Array of components to inject into the built-in Dashboard, _after_ the default dashboard contents. [Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/test/admin/components/AfterDashboard/index.tsx) |
+| **`AfterDashboard`**  | Array of components to inject into the built-in Dashboard, _after_ the default dashboard contents. [Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/test/admin/components/AfterDashboard/index.tsx)   |
 | **`BeforeLogin`**     | Array of components to inject into the built-in Login, _before_ the default login form.                                                                                                                     |
 | **`AfterLogin`**      | Array of components to inject into the built-in Login, _after_ the default login form.                                                                                                                      |
 | **`logout.Button`**   | A custom React component.                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`graphics.Icon`**   | Used as a graphic within the `Nav` component. Often represents a condensed version of a full logo.                                                                                                          |
 | **`graphics.Logo`**   | The full logo to be used in contexts like the `Login` view.                                                                                                                                                 |
 | **`providers`**       | Define your own provider components that will wrap the Payload Admin UI. [More](#custom-providers)                                                                                                          |
-| **`views`**           | Override or create new views within the Payload Admin UI. [More](#views)                                                                                                                             |
+| **`actions`**         | Array of custom components to be rendered in the Payload Admin UI header, providing additional interactivity and functionality.                                                                             |
+| **`views`**           | Override or create new views within the Payload Admin UI. [More](#views)                                                                                                                                    |
 
 Here is a full example showing how to swap some of these components for your own.
 
@@ -50,6 +51,7 @@ import {
   MyCustomAccount,
   MyCustomDashboard,
   MyProvider,
+  MyCustomAdminAction,
 } from './customComponents'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -60,6 +62,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
         Icon: MyCustomIcon,
         Logo: MyCustomLogo,
       },
+      actions: [MyCustomAdminAction],
       views: {
         Account: MyCustomAccount,
         Dashboard: MyCustomDashboard,
@@ -72,7 +75,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 #### Views
 
-You can easily swap entire views with your own by using the `admin.components.views` property. At the root level, Payload renders the following views dy default, all of which can be overridden:
+You can easily swap entire views with your own by using the `admin.components.views` property. At the root level, Payload renders the following views by default, all of which can be overridden:
 
 | Property           | Description                                                                                                                  |
 | ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -96,7 +99,7 @@ To swap out any of these views, simply pass in your custom component to the `adm
 }
 ```
 
-For more granular control, pass a configuration object instead. Payload exposes all of the properties of `<Route />` component in [React Router v5](https://v5.reactrouter.com):
+For more granular control, pass a configuration object instead. Each view corresponds to its own `<Route />` component in [React Router v5](https://v5.reactrouter.com). Payload exposes all of the properties of React Router:
 
 | Property           | Description                                                                                                                  |
 | ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -129,13 +132,19 @@ To add a _new_ view to the Admin Panel, simply add another key to the `views` ob
 }
 ```
 
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  Routes are cascading. This means that unless explicitly given the `exact` property, they will match on URLs that simply _start_ with the route's path. This is helpful when creating catch-all routes in your application. Alternatively, you could define your nested route _before_ your parent route.
+</Banner>
+
 _For more examples regarding how to customize components, look at the following [examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/test/admin/components)._
 
 For help on how to build your own custom view components, see [building a custom view component](#building-a-custom-view-component).
 
 ### Collections
 
-You can override components on a collection-by-collection basis via their `admin` property.
+You can override components on a collection-by-collection basis via the `admin.components` property.
 
 | Path                       | Description                                                                                                            |
 | -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -159,12 +168,12 @@ import * as React from 'react'
 import {
   CustomSaveButtonProps,
   CustomSaveDraftButtonProps,
-  CustomPublishButtonProps,
+  CustomPublishButtonType,
   CustomPreviewButtonProps,
 } from 'payload/types'
 
-export const CustomSaveButton: CustomSaveButtonProps = ({ DefaultButton, label }) => {
-  return <DefaultButton label={label} />
+export const CustomSaveButton: CustomSaveButtonProps = ({ DefaultButton, label, save }) => {
+  return <DefaultButton label={label} save={save} />
 }
 
 export const CustomSaveDraftButton: CustomSaveDraftButtonProps = ({
@@ -176,7 +185,7 @@ export const CustomSaveDraftButton: CustomSaveDraftButtonProps = ({
   return <DefaultButton label={label} disabled={disabled} saveDraft={saveDraft} />
 }
 
-export const CustomPublishButton: CustomPublishButtonProps = ({
+export const CustomPublishButton: CustomPublishButtonType = ({
   DefaultButton,
   disabled,
   label,
@@ -211,7 +220,7 @@ export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 
 #### Collection views
 
-To swap out entire views on collections, you can use the `admin.components.views` property on the collection's config. Payload renders the following views dy default, all of which can be overridden:
+To swap out entire views on collections, you can use the `admin.components.views` property on the collection's config. Payload renders the following views by default, all of which can be overridden:
 
 | Property           | Description                                                                                                                  |
 | ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -237,7 +246,11 @@ To swap out any of these views, simply pass in your custom component to the `adm
 
 _For help on how to build your own custom view components, see [building a custom view component](#building-a-custom-view-component)._
 
-To swap specific _nested_ views within the parent `Edit` view, you can use the `admin.components.views.Edit` property on the globals's config. This will only replace the nested view, leaving the page breadcrumbs, title, tabs, etc intact.
+**Customizing Nested Views within 'Edit' in Collections**
+
+The `Edit` view in collections consists of several nested views, each serving a unique purpose. You can customize these nested views using the `admin.components.views.Edit` property in the collection's configuration. This approach allows you to replace specific nested views while keeping the overall structure of the `Edit` view intact, including the page breadcrumbs, title, tabs, etc.
+
+Here's an example of how you can customize nested views within the `Edit` view in collections, including the use of the `actions` property:
 
 ```ts
 // Collection.ts
@@ -247,7 +260,29 @@ To swap specific _nested_ views within the parent `Edit` view, you can use the `
     components: {
       views: {
         Edit: {
-          Default: MyCustomDefaultTab,
+          Default: {
+            Component: MyCustomDefaultTab,
+            actions: [CollectionEditButton], // Custom actions for the default edit view
+          },
+          API: {
+            Component: MyCustomAPIView,
+            actions: [CollectionAPIButton], // Custom actions for API view
+          },
+          LivePreview: {
+            Component: MyCustomLivePreviewView,
+            actions: [CollectionLivePreviewButton], // Custom actions for Live Preview
+          },
+          Version: {
+            Component: MyCustomVersionView,
+            actions: [CollectionVersionButton], // Custom actions for Version view
+          },
+          Versions: {
+            Component: MyCustomVersionsView,
+            actions: [CollectionVersionsButton], // Custom actions for Versions view
+          },
+        },
+        List: {
+          actions: [CollectionListButton],
         },
       },
     },
@@ -255,23 +290,25 @@ To swap specific _nested_ views within the parent `Edit` view, you can use the `
 }
 ```
 
+**Adding New Tabs to 'Edit' View**
+
 You can also add _new_ tabs to the `Edit` view by adding another key to the `components.views.Edit[key]` object with a `path` and `Component` property. See [Custom Tabs](#custom-tabs) for more information.
 
 ### Globals
 
-As with Collections, you can override components on a global-by-global basis via their `admin` property.
+As with Collections, you can override components on a global-by-global basis via the `admin.components` property.
 
-| Path                       | Description                                                                                                            |
-| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`edit.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default `Save` button with a custom component. Drafts must be disabled                                     |
-| **`edit.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default `Save Draft` button with a custom component. Drafts must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
-| **`edit.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default `Publish` button with a custom component. Drafts must be enabled.                                  |
-| **`edit.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default `Preview` button with a custom component.                                                          |
-| **`views`**                | Override or create new views within the Payload Admin UI. [More](#global-views)                                        |
+| Path                           | Description                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`elements.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default `Save` button with a custom component. Drafts must be disabled                                     |
+| **`elements.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default `Save Draft` button with a custom component. Drafts must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
+| **`elements.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default `Publish` button with a custom component. Drafts must be enabled.                                  |
+| **`elements.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default `Preview` button with a custom component.                                                          |
+| **`views`**                    | Override or create new views within the Payload Admin UI. [More](#global-views)                                        |
 
 #### Global views
 
-To swap out views for globals, you can use the `admin.components.views` property on the global's config. Payload renders the following views dy default, all of which can be overridden:
+To swap out views for globals, you can use the `admin.components.views` property on the global's config. Payload renders the following views by default, all of which can be overridden:
 
 | Property           | Description                                                                                                                  |
 | ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -295,7 +332,11 @@ To swap out any of these views, simply pass in your custom component to the `adm
 
 _For help on how to build your own custom view components, see [building a custom view component](#building-a-custom-view-component)._
 
-To swap specific _nested_ views within the parent `Edit` view, you can use the `admin.components.views.Edit` property on the globals's config. This will only replace the nested view, leaving the page breadcrumbs, title, and tabs intact.
+**Customizing Nested Views within 'Edit' in Globals**
+
+Similar to collections, Globals allow for detailed customization within the `Edit` view. This includes the ability to swap specific nested views while maintaining the overall structure of the `Edit` view. You can use the `admin.components.views.Edit` property in the Globals configuration to achieve this, and this will only replace the nested view, leaving the page breadcrumbs, title, and tabs intact.
+
+Here's how you can customize nested views within the `Edit` view in Globals, including the use of the `actions` property:
 
 ```ts
 // Global.ts
@@ -305,7 +346,26 @@ To swap specific _nested_ views within the parent `Edit` view, you can use the `
     components: {
       views: {
         Edit: {
-          Default: MyCustomDefaultTab,
+          Default: {
+            Component: MyCustomGlobalDefaultTab,
+            actions: [GlobalEditButton], // Custom actions for the default edit view
+          },
+          API: {
+            Component: MyCustomGlobalAPIView,
+            actions: [GlobalAPIButton], // Custom actions for API view
+          },
+          LivePreview: {
+            Component: MyCustomGlobalLivePreviewView,
+            actions: [GlobalLivePreviewButton], // Custom actions for Live Preview
+          },
+          Version: {
+            Component: MyCustomGlobalVersionView,
+            actions: [GlobalVersionButton], // Custom actions for Version view
+          },
+          Versions: {
+            Component: MyCustomGlobalVersionsView,
+            actions: [GlobalVersionsButton], // Custom actions for Versions view
+          },
         },
       },
     },
@@ -317,7 +377,7 @@ You can also add _new_ tabs to the `Edit` view by adding another key to the `com
 
 ### Custom Tabs
 
-You can easily swap individual collection or global edit views. To do this, pass an _object_ to the `admin.components.views.Edit` property of the config. Payload renders the following views dy default, all of which can be overridden:
+You can easily swap individual collection or global edit views. To do this, pass an _object_ to the `admin.components.views.Edit` property of the config. Payload renders the following views by default, all of which can be overridden:
 
 | Property           | Description                                                                                                                  |
 | ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -426,6 +486,15 @@ All Payload fields support the ability to swap in your own React components. So,
 | **`Cell`**   | Used in the `List` view's table to represent a table-based preview of the data stored in the field. [More](#cell-component) |
 | **`Field`**  | Swap out the field itself within all `Edit` views. [More](#field-component)                                                 |
 
+As an alternative to replacing the entire Field component, you may want to keep the majority of the default Field component and only swap components within. This allows you to replace the **`Label`** or **`Error`** within a field component or add additional components inside the field with **`beforeInput`** or **`afterInput`**. **`beforeInput`** and **`afterInput`** are allowed in any fields that don't contain other fields, except [UI](/docs/fields/ui) and [Rich Text](/docs/fields/rich-text).
+
+| Component         | Description                                                                                                     |
+| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`Label`**       | Override the default Label in the Field Component. [More](#label-component)                                     |
+| **`Error`**       | Override the default Label in the Field Component. [More](#error-component)                                     |
+| **`beforeInput`** | An array of elements that will be added before `input`/`textarea` elements. [More](#afterinput-and-beforeinput) |
+| **`afterInput`**  | An array of elements that will be added after `input`/`textarea` elements. [More](#afterinput-and-beforeinput)  |
+
 ## Cell Component
 
 These are the props that will be passed to your custom Cell to use in your own components.
@@ -442,7 +511,9 @@ These are the props that will be passed to your custom Cell to use in your own c
 
 ```tsx
 import React from 'react'
+import type { Props } from 'payload/components/views/Cell'
 import './index.scss'
+
 const baseClass = 'custom-cell'
 
 const CustomCell: React.FC<Props> = (props) => {
@@ -463,14 +534,13 @@ When swapping out the `Field` component, you'll be responsible for sending and r
 ```tsx
 import { useField } from 'payload/components/forms'
 
-type Props = { path: string }
-
-const CustomTextField: React.FC<Props> = ({ path }) => {
+const CustomTextField: React.FC<{ path: string }> = ({ path }) => {
   // highlight-start
-  const { value, setValue } = useField<Props>({ path })
+  const { value, setValue } = useField<string>({ path })
   // highlight-end
 
-  return <input onChange={(e) => setValue(e.target.value)} value={value.path} />
+
+  return <input onChange={(e) => setValue(e.target.value)} value={value} />
 }
 ```
 
@@ -479,6 +549,103 @@ const CustomTextField: React.FC<Props> = ({ path }) => {
   components, including the <strong>useField</strong> hook, [click here](/docs/admin/hooks).
 </Banner>
 
+## Label Component
+
+These are the props that will be passed to your custom Label.
+
+| Property         | Description                                                      |
+| ---------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`htmlFor`**    | Property used to set `for` attribute for label.                  |
+| **`label`**      | Label value provided in field, it can be used with i18n.         |
+| **`required`**   | A boolean value that represents if the field is required or not. |
+
+#### Example
+
+```tsx
+import React from 'react'
+import { useTranslation } from 'react-i18next'
+
+import { getTranslation } from 'payload/utilities/getTranslation'
+
+type Props = {
+  htmlFor?: string
+  label?: Record<string, string> | false | string
+  required?: boolean
+}
+
+const CustomLabel: React.FC<Props> = (props) => {
+  const { htmlFor, label, required = false } = props
+
+  const { i18n } = useTranslation()
+
+  if (label) {
+    return (<span>
+      {getTranslation(label, i18n)}
+      {required && <span className="required">*</span>}
+    </span>);
+  }
+
+  return null
+}
+```
+
+## Error Component
+
+These are the props that will be passed to your custom Error.
+
+| Property         | Description                                                   |
+| ---------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`message`**    | The error message.                                            |
+| **`showError`**  | A boolean value that represents if the error should be shown. |
+
+#### Example
+
+```tsx
+import React from 'react'
+
+type Props = {
+  message: string
+  showError?: boolean
+}
+
+const CustomError: React.FC<Props> = (props) => {
+  const { message, showError } = props
+
+  if (showError) {
+    return <p style={{color: 'red'}}>{message}</p>
+  } else return null;
+}
+```
+
+## afterInput and beforeInput
+
+With these properties you can add multiple components before and after the input element. For example, you can add an absolutely positioned button to clear the current field value.
+
+#### Example
+
+```tsx
+import React from 'react'
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+import './style.scss'
+
+const ClearButton: React.FC = () => {
+  return <button onClick={() => {/* ... */}}>X</button>
+}
+
+const titleField: Field = {
+  name: 'title',
+  type: 'text',
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      afterInput: [ClearButton]
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+export default titleField;
+```
+
 ## Custom providers
 
 As your admin customizations gets more complex you may want to share state between fields or other components. You can add custom providers to do add your own context to any Payload app for use in other custom components within the admin panel. Within your config add `admin.components.providers`, these can be used to share context or provide other custom functionality. Read the [React context](https://reactjs.org/docs/context.html) docs to learn more.
@@ -490,7 +657,7 @@ As your admin customizations gets more complex you may want to share state betwe
 
 ### Styling Custom Components
 
-Payload exports its SCSS variables and mixins for reuse in your own custom components. This is helpful in cases where you might want to style a custom input similarly to Payload's built-ini styling, so it blends more thoroughly into the existing admin UI.
+Payload exports its SCSS variables and mixins for reuse in your own custom components. This is helpful in cases where you might want to style a custom input similarly to Payload's built-in styling, so it blends more thoroughly into the existing admin UI.
 
 To make use of Payload SCSS variables / mixins to use directly in your own components, you can import them as follows:
 

docs/admin/excluding-server-code.mdx

@@ -91,14 +91,34 @@ This way when your bundler goes to import a file that contains server-only modul
 
 To remove files that contain server-only modules from your bundle, you can use an `alias`.
 
-First create new file that exports an empty object:
-```js
-// mocks/emptyObject.js
+In the Subscriptions config file above, we are importing the hook like so:
 
-export default {}
+```ts
+// collections/Subscriptions/index.ts
+
+import createStripeSubscription from './hooks/createStripeSubscription'
 ```
 
-Then, in your Payload config, you can alias the file containing the server-only module to the mock module. For example, here's how you'd do this in Webpack:
+By default the browser bundle will now include all the code from that file and any files down the tree. We know that the file imports `stripe`.
+
+To fix this, we need to alias the `createStripeSubscription` file to a different file that can safely be included in the browser bundle.
+
+First, we will create a mock file to replace the server-only file when bundling:
+```js
+// mocks/modules.js
+
+export default {}
+
+/**
+ * NOTE: if you are destructuring an import
+ * the mock file will need to export matching
+ * variables as the destructured object.
+ *
+ * export const namedExport = {}
+ */
+```
+
+Aliasing with [Webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) can be done by:
 
 ```ts
 // payload.config.ts
@@ -106,10 +126,16 @@ Then, in your Payload config, you can alias the file containing the server-only
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
 
+import { Subscriptions } from './collections/Subscriptions'
+
 const mockModulePath = path.resolve(__dirname, 'mocks/emptyObject.js')
-const pathToFileWithServerOnlyModule = path.resolve(__dirname, 'hooks/syncStripeCustomer.ts')
+const fullFilePath = path.resolve(
+  __dirname,
+  'collections/Subscriptions/hooks/createStripeSubscription'
+)
 
 export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [Subscriptions],
   admin: {
     bundler: webpackBundler(),
     webpack: (config) => {
@@ -120,7 +146,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
           // highlight-start
           alias: {
             ...config.resolve.alias,
-            [pathToFileWithServerOnlyModule]: mockModulePath,
+            [fullFilePath]: mockModulePath,
           },
           // highlight-end
         },
@@ -129,3 +155,52 @@ export default buildConfig({
   },
 })
 ```
+
+Aliasing with [Vite](/docs/admin/vite) can be done by:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
+
+import { Subscriptions } from './collections/Subscriptions'
+
+const mockModulePath = path.resolve(__dirname, 'mocks/emptyObject.js')
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [Subscriptions],
+  admin: {
+    bundler: viteBundler(),
+    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
+      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {};
+      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string; }[] = [];
+
+      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
+      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
+        aliasArray = existingAliases;
+      } else {
+        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases);
+      }
+
+
+      // highlight-start
+      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
+      // remember, vite aliases are exact-match only
+      aliasArray.push({
+        find: '../server-only-module',
+        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
+      });
+      // highlight-end
+
+      return {
+        ...incomingViteConfig,
+        resolve: {
+          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
+          alias: aliasArray,
+        }
+      };
+    },
+  },
+})
+```

docs/admin/hooks.mdx

@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties: |
       },
       {
         drawerTitle: 'addFieldRow',
-        drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programtically add a row to an array or block field.',
+        drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programmatically add a row to an array or block field.',
         drawerSlug: 'addFieldRow',
         drawerContent: (
 <>
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
       },
       {
         drawerTitle: 'removeFieldRow',
-        drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programtically remove a row from an array or block field.',
+        drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programmatically remove a row from an array or block field.',
         drawerSlug: 'removeFieldRow',
         drawerContent: (
 <>
@@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
       },
       {
         drawerTitle: 'replaceFieldRow',
-        drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programtically replace a row from an array or block field.',
+        drawerDescription: 'A useful method to programmatically replace a row from an array or block field.',
         drawerSlug: 'replaceFieldRow',
         drawerContent: (
 <>
@@ -635,6 +635,37 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
   ]}
 />
 
+### useCollapsible
+
+The `useCollapsible` hook allows you to control parent collapsibles:
+
+| Property                  | Description                                                                                                        |
+|---------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`collapsed`**          | State of the collapsible. `true` if open, `false` if collapsed                                                 |
+| **`isVisible`**              | If nested, determine if the nearest collapsible is visible. `true` if no parent is closed, `false` otherwise                                                        |
+| **`toggle`**                  | Toggles the state of the nearest collapsible                                                                |
+| **`withinCollapsible`**      | Determine when you are within another collaspible                                 |                                               |
+
+**Example:**
+
+```tsx
+import React from 'react'
+
+import { useCollapsible } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+
+const CustomComponent: React.FC = () => {
+  const { collapsed, toggle } = useCollapsible()
+  return (
+    <div>
+      <p className="field-type">I am {collapsed ? 'closed' : 'open'}</p>
+      <button onClick={toggle} type="button">
+        Toggle
+      </button>
+    </div>
+  )
+}
+```
+
 ### useDocumentInfo
 
 The `useDocumentInfo` hook provides lots of information about the document currently being edited, including the following:
@@ -758,3 +789,85 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 ### usePreferences
 
 Returns methods to set and get user preferences. More info can be found [here](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/preferences).
+
+### useTheme
+
+Returns the currently selected theme (`light`, `dark` or `auto`), a set function to update it and a boolean `autoMode`, used to determine if the theme value should be set automatically based on the user's device preferences.
+
+```tsx
+import { useTheme } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+
+const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
+  // highlight-start
+  const { autoMode, setTheme, theme } = useTheme()
+  // highlight-end
+
+  return (
+    <>
+      <span>The current theme is {theme} and autoMode is {autoMode}</span>
+      <button
+        type="button"
+        onClick={() => setTheme(prev => prev === "light" ? "dark" : "light")}
+      >
+        Toggle theme
+      </button>
+    </>
+    )
+}
+```
+
+### useTableColumns
+
+Returns methods to manipulate table columns
+
+```tsx
+import { useTableColumns } from 'payload/components/hooks'
+
+const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
+  // highlight-start
+  const { setActiveColumns } = useTableColumns()
+
+  const resetColumns = () => {
+    setActiveColumns(['id', 'createdAt', 'updatedAt'])
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+
+  return (
+    <button
+      type="button"
+      onClick={resetColumns}
+    >
+      Reset columns
+    </button>
+  )
+}
+```
+
+### useDocumentEvents
+
+The `useDocumentEvents` hook provides a way of subscribing to cross-document events, such as updates made to nested documents within a drawer. This hook will report document events that are outside the scope of the document currently being edited. This hook provides the following:
+
+| Property                  | Description                                                                                                                               |
+|---------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`mostRecentUpdate`**    | An object containing the most recently updated document. It contains the `entitySlug`, `id` (if collection), and `updatedAt` properties   |
+| **`reportUpdate`**        | A method used to report updates to documents. It accepts the same arguments as the `mostRecentUpdate` property.                           |
+
+**Example:**
+
+```tsx
+import { useDocumentEvents } from 'payload/components/hooks'
+
+const ListenForUpdates: React.FC = () => {
+  const { mostRecentUpdate } = useDocumentEvents()
+
+  return (
+    <span>
+      {JSON.stringify(mostRecentUpdate)}
+    </span>
+  )
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  Right now the `useDocumentEvents` hook only tracks recently updated documents, but in the future it will track more document-related events as needed, such as document creation, deletion, etc.
+</Banner>

docs/admin/vite.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,10 @@ order: 90
 desc: NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN
 ---
 
+<Banner type="info">
+  The Vite bundler is currently in beta. If you would like to help us test this package, we'd love to hear from you if you find any [bugs or issues](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/)!
+</Banner>
+
 Payload has a Vite bundler that you can install and bundle the Admin Panel with. This is an alternative to the [Webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) bundler and might give some performance boosts to your development workflow.
 
 To use Vite as your bundler, first you need to install the package:
@@ -13,9 +17,19 @@ To use Vite as your bundler, first you need to install the package:
 yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-vite
 ```
 
-<Banner>
-  The Vite bundler is currently in beta. If you would like to help us test this package, we'd love to hear if you find any bugs or issues!
-</Banner>
+Then you will need to add the [bundler](/docs/admin/bundlers) to your Payload config:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from '@payloadcms/config'
+import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [],
+  admin: {
+    bundler: viteBundler(),
+  }
+})
+```
 
 Vite works fundamentally differently than Webpack. In development mode, it will first pre-bundle any of your dependencies that are CommonJS-only, and then it'll leverage ESM directly in your browser for a better HMR experience.
 
@@ -29,10 +43,53 @@ This is because Vite aliases work fundamentally differently than Webpack aliases
 
 Here are the main differences between how Vite aliases work and how Webpack aliases work.
 
-**Vite aliases do not work with absolute paths.** 
+**Vite aliases do not work with absolute paths.**
 
-In Vite, an alias will only match if the `find` property _exactly matches_ how you are importing your server-only file. So if you are importing a file with a relative path, i.e. `'../../my-module'`, and your alias is absolute, your alias will not work.
+In Vite, alias keys must <strong>exactly match</strong> a import paths. If you have 2 files that import the same server-only module, but have different import paths, you would need to add 2 aliases to support both import paths.
 
+```ts
+// File A
+import serverOnlyModule from '../server-only-module'
+
+// File B
+import serverOnlyModule from '../../server-only-module'
+
+// payload.config.ts
+// You would need to add 2 aliases to support both import paths
+export const buildConfig({
+  collections: [],
+  admin: {
+    bundler: viteBundler(),
+    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
+      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {};
+      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string; }[] = [];
+
+      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
+      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
+        aliasArray = existingAliases;
+      } else {
+        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases);
+      }
+
+      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
+      aliasArray.push({
+        find: '../server-only-module',
+        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
+        find: '../../server-only-module',
+        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
+      });
+
+      return {
+        ...incomingViteConfig,
+        resolve: {
+          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
+          alias: aliasArray,
+        }
+      };
+    },
+  }
+})
+```
 
 **Vite aliases do not get applied to pre-bundled dependencies.**
 
@@ -49,7 +106,8 @@ That plugin should create an alias to support Vite as follows:
 ```ts
 {
   // aliases go here
-  'payload-plugin-cool': path.resolve(__dirname, './my-admin-plugin.js')
+  find: 'payload-plugin-cool',
+  replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './my-admin-plugin.js')
 }
 
 ```
@@ -58,7 +116,7 @@ This will effectively alias the entire plugin and work with Vite. If the plugin
 
 ### Extending the Vite config
 
-The Payload config supports a new property for plugins to be able to extend the Vite config specifically. That property exists on the main Payload config under `admin.vite`. 
+The Payload config supports a new property for plugins to be able to extend the Vite config specifically. That property exists on the main Payload config under `admin.vite`. You can check out the [Vite docs](https://vitejs.dev/config/shared-options.html) for more information on what you can do with the Vite config.
 
 It's a function that takes a Vite config, and returns an updated Vite config. Here's an example:
 
@@ -66,17 +124,38 @@ It's a function that takes a Vite config, and returns an updated Vite config. He
 export const buildConfig({
   collections: [],
   admin: {
-    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => ({
-      ...incomingViteConfig,
-      resolve: {
-        ...incomingViteConfig.resolve,
-        // Do whatever you need here 
+    bundler: viteBundler(),
+    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
+      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {};
+      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string; }[] = [];
+
+      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
+      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
+        aliasArray = existingAliases;
+      } else {
+        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases);
       }
-    })
+
+      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
+      aliasArray.push({
+        find: '../server-only-module',
+        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
+      });
+
+      return {
+        ...incomingViteConfig,
+        resolve: {
+          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
+          alias: aliasArray,
+        }
+      };
+    },
   }
 })
 ```
 
+Learn more about [aliasing server-only modules](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/excluding-server-code#aliasing-server-only-modules).
+
 Even though there is a new property for Vite configs specifically, we have implemented some "compatibility" between Webpack and Vite out-of-the-box.
 
-If your config specifies Webpack aliases, we attempt to leverage them automatically within the Vite config. They are merged into the Vite alias configuration seamlessly and may work out-of-the-box.
+If your config specifies Webpack aliases, we attempt to leverage them automatically within the Vite config. They are merged into the Vite alias configuration seamlessly and may work out-of-the-box.

docs/authentication/config.mdx

@@ -45,6 +45,13 @@ To enable API keys on a collection, set the `useAPIKey` auth option to `true`. F
   your API keys will not be.
 </Banner>
 
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you change your `PAYLOAD_SECRET`, you will need to regenerate your API keys.
+  <br />
+  The secret key is used to encrypt the API keys, so if you change the secret, existing API keys will no longer be valid.
+</Banner>
+
 #### Authenticating via API Key
 
 To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper access control. By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
@@ -209,7 +216,7 @@ Example:
 {
   slug: 'customers',
   auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
+    verify: {
       // highlight-start
       generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
         return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;

docs/authentication/overview.mdx

@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Once enabled, each document that is created within the Collection can be thought
 
 ### Token-based auth
 
-Successfully logging in returns a `JWT` (JSON web token) which is how a user will identify themselves to Payload. By providing this JWT via either an HTTP-only cookie or an `Authorization` header, Payload will automatically identify the user and add its user JWT data to the Express `req`, which is available throughout Payload including within access control, hooks, and more.
+Successfully logging in returns a `JWT` (JSON web token) which is how a user will identify themselves to Payload. By providing this JWT via either an HTTP-only cookie or an `Authorization: JWT` or `Authorization: Bearer` header, Payload will automatically identify the user and add its user JWT data to the Express `req`, which is available throughout Payload including within access control, hooks, and more.
 
 You can specify what data gets encoded to the JWT token by setting `saveToJWT` to true in your auth collection fields. If you wish to use a different key other than the field `name`, you can provide it to `saveToJWT` as a string. It is also possible to use `saveToJWT` on fields that are nested in inside groups and tabs. If a group has a `saveToJWT` set it will include the object with all sub-fields in the token. You can set `saveToJWT: false` for any fields you wish to omit. If a field inside a group has `saveToJWT` set, but the group does not, the field will be included at the top level of the token.
 

docs/cloud/projects.mdx

@@ -30,6 +30,26 @@ Payload Cloud gives you S3 file storage backed by Cloudflare as a CDN, and this
 
 AWS Cognito is used for authentication to your S3 bucket. The [Payload Cloud Plugin](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-cloud) will automatically pick up these values. These values are only if you'd like to access your files directly, outside of Payload Cloud.
 
+#### Accessing Files Outside of Payload Cloud
+
+If you'd like to access your files outside of Payload Cloud, you'll need to retrieve some values from your project's settings and put them into your environment variables. In Payload Cloud, navigate to the File Storage tab and copy the values using the copy button. Put these values in your .env file. Also copy the Cognito Password value separately and put into your .env file as well.
+
+When you are done, you should have the following values in your .env file:
+
+```env
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD=true
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD_ENVIRONMENT=prod
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD_COGNITO_USER_POOL_CLIENT_ID=
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD_COGNITO_USER_POOL_ID=
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD_COGNITO_IDENTITY_POOL_ID=
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD_PROJECT_ID=
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD_BUCKET=
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD_BUCKET_REGION=
+PAYLOAD_CLOUD_COGNITO_PASSWORD=
+```
+
+The plugin will pick up these values and use them to access your files.
+
 ### Build Settings
 
 You can update settings from your Project’s Settings tab. Changes to your build settings will trigger a redeployment of your project.

docs/configuration/collections.mdx

@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then im
 | **`typescript`**  | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                      |
 | **`defaultSort`** | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the collection List view. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.                                                               |
 | **`custom`**      | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`dbName`**      | Custom table or collection name depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -59,7 +60,8 @@ export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
 #### More collection config examples
 
 You can find an assortment
-of [example collection configs](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/tree/master/src/collections) in the Public
+of [example collection configs](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/tree/master/src/payload/collections) in the
+Public
 Demo source code on GitHub.
 
 ### Admin options

docs/configuration/globals.mdx

@@ -6,14 +6,18 @@ desc: Set up your Global config for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs
 keywords: globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Global configs are in many ways similar to [Collections](/docs/configuration/collections). The big difference is that Collections will potentially contain _many_ documents, while a Global is a "one-off". Globals are perfect for things like header nav, site-wide banner alerts, app-wide localized strings, and other "global" data that your site or app might rely on.
+Global configs are in many ways similar to [Collections](/docs/configuration/collections). The big difference is that
+Collections will potentially contain _many_ documents, while a Global is a "one-off". Globals are perfect for things
+like header nav, site-wide banner alerts, app-wide localized strings, and other "global" data that your site or app
+might rely on.
 
-As with Collection configs, it's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main Payload config.
+As with Collection configs, it's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into
+the main Payload config.
 
 ## Options
 
 | Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+|--------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | **`slug`** \*      | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`fields`** \*    | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
 | **`label`**        | Text for the name in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                              |
@@ -26,6 +30,7 @@ As with Collection configs, it's often best practice to write your Globals in se
 | **`graphQL.name`** | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`typescript`**   | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                  |
 | **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`dbName`**       | Custom table or collection name for this global depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -59,26 +64,30 @@ export default Nav
 
 #### Global config example
 
-You can find an [example Global config](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/blob/master/src/globals/MainMenu.ts) in the Public Demo source code on GitHub.
+You can find a few [example Global configs](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/tree/master/src/payload/globals)
+in the Public Demo source code on GitHub.
 
 ### Admin options
 
-You can customize the way that the Admin panel behaves on a Global-by-Global basis by defining the `admin` property on a Global's config.
+You can customize the way that the Admin panel behaves on a Global-by-Global basis by defining the `admin` property on a
+Global's config.
 
-| Option       | Description                                                                                                                               |
-| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `group`      | Text used as a label for grouping collection and global links together in the navigation.                                                 |
-| `hidden`     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this global from navigation and admin routing.         |
-| `components` | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More](/docs/admin/components#globals)                                   |
-| `preview`    | Function to generate a preview URL within the Admin panel for this global that can point to your app. [More](#preview).                   |
-| `livePreview`| Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More](/docs/live-preview/overview).                  |
-| `hideAPIURL` | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                            |
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
+|---------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `group`       | Text used as a label for grouping collection and global links together in the navigation.                                         |
+| `hidden`      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this global from navigation and admin routing. |
+| `components`  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More](/docs/admin/components#globals)                           |
+| `preview`     | Function to generate a preview URL within the Admin panel for this global that can point to your app. [More](#preview).           |
+| `livePreview` | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More](/docs/live-preview/overview).          |
+| `hideAPIURL`  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
 
 ### Preview
 
-Global `admin` options can accept a `preview` function that will be used to generate a link pointing to the frontend of your app to preview data.
+Global `admin` options can accept a `preview` function that will be used to generate a link pointing to the frontend of
+your app to preview data.
 
-If the function is specified, a Preview button will automatically appear in the corresponding global's Edit view. Clicking the Preview button will link to the URL that is generated by the function.
+If the function is specified, a Preview button will automatically appear in the corresponding global's Edit view.
+Clicking the Preview button will link to the URL that is generated by the function.
 
 **The preview function accepts two arguments:**
 
@@ -113,15 +122,20 @@ export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
 
 ### Access control
 
-As with Collections, you can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with this Global) on a Global-by-Global basis. However, Globals only have `update` and `read` access control due to their nature of only having one document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) docs.
+As with Collections, you can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with this Global) on a
+Global-by-Global basis. However, Globals only have `update` and `read` access control due to their nature of only having
+one document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) docs.
 
 ### Hooks
 
-Globals also fully support a smaller subset of Hooks. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](/docs/hooks/overview) documentation.
+Globals also fully support a smaller subset of Hooks. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](/docs/hooks/overview)
+documentation.
 
 ### Field types
 
-Globals support all field types that Payload has to offer—including simple fields like text and checkboxes all the way to more complicated layout-building field groups like Blocks. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) to learn more about field types.
+Globals support all field types that Payload has to offer—including simple fields like text and checkboxes all the way
+to more complicated layout-building field groups like Blocks. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) to learn more about
+field types.
 
 ### TypeScript
 

docs/configuration/localization.mdx

@@ -6,11 +6,13 @@ desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to you
 keywords: localization, internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Payload features deep field-based localization support. Maintaining as many locales as you need is easy. All localization support is opt-in by default. To do so, follow the two steps below.
+Payload features deep field-based localization support. Maintaining as many locales as you need is easy. All
+localization support is opt-in by default. To do so, follow the two steps below.
 
 ### Enabling in the Payload config
 
-Add the `localization` property to your Payload config to enable localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
+Add the `localization` property to your Payload config to enable localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a
+list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
 
 **Example Payload config set up for localization:**
 
@@ -47,7 +49,8 @@ export default buildConfig({
       {
         label: 'Arabic',
         code: 'ar',
-        // opt-in to setting default text-alignment on Input fields to rtl (right-to-left) when current locale is rtl
+        // opt-in to setting default text-alignment on Input fields to rtl (right-to-left)
+        // when current locale is rtl
         rtl: true,
       },
     ],
@@ -57,23 +60,75 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
+**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects (
+including [internationalization](/docs/configuration/i18n) support):**
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    // collections go here
+  ],
+  localization: {
+    locales: [
+      {
+        label: {
+          en: 'English', // English label
+          nb: 'Engelsk', // Norwegian label
+        },
+        code: 'en',
+      },
+      {
+        label: {
+          en: 'Norwegian', // English label
+          nb: 'Norsk', // Norwegian label
+        },
+        code: 'nb',
+      },
+    ],
+    defaultLocale: 'en',
+    fallback: true,
+  },
+})
+```
+
 **Here is a brief explanation of each of the options available within the `localization` property:**
 
 **`locales`**
 
-Array-based list of all locales that you would like to support. These can be strings of locale codes or objects with a `label`, a locale `code`, and the `rtl` (right-to-left) property. The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
+Array-based list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be an array containing strings for each
+language code you want your project to store and serve or objects with a `label`, a locale `code`, `rtl` (
+right-to-left), and `fallbackLocale` property. The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you
+to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter
+language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
+
+### Locale Properties:
+
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                    |
+|----------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`code`** \*        | Unique code to identify the language throughout the APIs for `locale` and `fallbackLocale`                                     |
+| **`label`**          | A string to use for the selector when choosing a language, or an object keyed on the i18n keys for different languages in use. |
+| **`rtl`**            | A boolean that when true will make the admin UI display in Right-To-Left.                                                      |
+| **`fallbackLocale`** | The code for this language to fallback to when properties of a document are not present.                                       |
+
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 **`defaultLocale`**
 
-Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified, documents will be returned in this locale.
+Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified,
+documents will be returned in this locale.
 
 **`fallback`**
 
-Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated.
+Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a
+localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically
+fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated.
 
 ### Field by field localization
 
-Payload localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload config to support localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
+Payload localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload config
+to support localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
 
 **Here is an example of how to enable localization for a field:**
 
@@ -87,9 +142,11 @@ Payload localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addit
 }
 ```
 
-With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of a single string.
+With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of
+a single string.
 
-All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s and `block`s.
+All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s
+and `block`s.
 
 <Banner>
   <strong>Note:</strong>
@@ -111,7 +168,8 @@ All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even t
 
 ### Retrieving localized docs
 
-When retrieving documents, you can specify which locale you'd like to receive as well as which fallback locale should be used.
+When retrieving documents, you can specify which locale you'd like to receive as well as which fallback locale should be
+used.
 
 ##### REST API
 
@@ -123,7 +181,8 @@ Specify your desired locale by providing the `locale` query parameter directly i
 
 **`?fallback-locale=`**
 
-Specify fallback locale to be used by providing the `fallback-locale` query parameter. This can be provided as either a valid locale as provided to your base Payload config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
+Specify fallback locale to be used by providing the `fallback-locale` query parameter. This can be provided as either a
+valid locale as provided to your base Payload config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
 
 **Example:**
 
@@ -135,7 +194,9 @@ fetch('https://localhost:3000/api/pages?locale=es&fallback-locale=none');
 
 In the GraphQL API, you can specify `locale` and `fallbackLocale` args to all relevant queries and mutations.
 
-The `locale` arg will only accept valid locales, but locales will be formatted automatically as valid GraphQL enum values (dashes or special characters will be converted to underscores, spaces will be removed, etc.). If you are curious to see how locales are auto-formatted, you can use the [GraphQL playground](/docs/graphql/overview#graphql-playground).
+The `locale` arg will only accept valid locales, but locales will be formatted automatically as valid GraphQL enum
+values (dashes or special characters will be converted to underscores, spaces will be removed, etc.). If you are curious
+to see how locales are auto-formatted, you can use the [GraphQL playground](/docs/graphql/overview#graphql-playground).
 
 The `fallbackLocale` arg will accept valid locales as well as `none` to disable falling back.
 
@@ -143,11 +204,11 @@ The `fallbackLocale` arg will accept valid locales as well as `none` to disable
 
 ```graphql
 query {
-  Posts(locale: de, fallbackLocale: none) {
-    docs {
-      title
+    Posts(locale: de, fallbackLocale: none) {
+        docs {
+            title
+        }
     }
-  }
 }
 ```
 
@@ -159,7 +220,9 @@ query {
 
 ##### Local API
 
-You can specify `locale` as well as `fallbackLocale` within the Local API as well as properties on the `options` argument. The `locale` property will accept any valid locale, and the `fallbackLocale` property will accept any valid locale as well as `'null'`, `'false'`, `false`, and `'none'`.
+You can specify `locale` as well as `fallbackLocale` within the Local API as well as properties on the `options`
+argument. The `locale` property will accept any valid locale, and the `fallbackLocale` property will accept any valid
+locale as well as `'null'`, `'false'`, `false`, and `'none'`.
 
 **Example:**
 

docs/configuration/overview.mdx

@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 #### Full example config
 
-You can see a full [example config](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/blob/master/src/payload.config.ts) in the Public Demo source code on GitHub.
+You can see a full [example config](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/blob/master/src/payload/payload.config.ts) in the Public Demo source code on GitHub.
 
 ### Using environment variables in your config
 

docs/database/migrations.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ keywords: database, migrations, ddl, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Cont
 desc: Payload features first-party database migrations all done in TypeScript.
 ---
 
-Payload exposes a full suite of migration controls available for your use. Migration commands are accessible via the `npm run payload` command in your project directory.
+Payload exposes a full suite of migration controls available for your use. Migration commands are accessible via
+the `npm run payload` command in your project directory.
 
 Ensure you have an npm script called "payload" in your `package.json` file.
 
@@ -24,29 +25,44 @@ Ensure you have an npm script called "payload" in your `package.json` file.
 
 ### Migration file contents
 
-Payload stores all created migrations in a folder that you can specify. By default, migrations are stored in `./src/migrations`.
+Payload stores all created migrations in a folder that you can specify. By default, migrations are stored
+in `./src/migrations`.
 
-A migration file has two exports - an `up` function, which is called when a migration is executed, and a `down` function that will be called if for some reason the migration fails to complete successfully. The `up` function should contain all changes that you attempt to make within the migration, and the `down` should ideally revert any changes you make.
+A migration file has two exports - an `up` function, which is called when a migration is executed, and a `down` function
+that will be called if for some reason the migration fails to complete successfully. The `up` function should contain
+all changes that you attempt to make within the migration, and the `down` should ideally revert any changes you make.
 
-For an added level of safety, migrations should leverage Payload [transactions](/docs/database/transactions).
+For an added level of safety, migrations should leverage Payload [transactions](/docs/database/transactions). Migration
+functions should make use of the `req` by adding it to the arguments of your payload local API calls such
+as `payload.create` and database adapter methods like `payload.db.create`.
 
 Here is an example migration file:
 
 ```ts
 import { MigrateUpArgs, MigrateDownArgs } from '@payloadcms/your-db-adapter'
 
-export async function up({ payload }: MigrateUpArgs): Promise<void> {
+export async function up ({ payload, req }: MigrateUpArgs): Promise<void> {
   // Perform changes to your database here.
   // You have access to `payload` as an argument, and
   // everything is done in TypeScript.
 };
 
-export async function down({ payload }: MigrateDownArgs): Promise<void> {
+export async function down ({ payload, req }: MigrateDownArgs): Promise<void> {
   // Do whatever you need to revert changes if the `up` function fails
 };
 ```
 
-All database adapters should implement similar migration patterns, but there will be small differences based on the adapter and its specific needs. Below is a list of all migration commands that should be supported by your database adapter.
+### Migrations Directory
+
+Each DB adapter has an optional property `migrationDir` where you can override where you want your migrations to be
+stored/read. If this is not specified, Payload will check the default and possibly make a best effort to find your
+migrations directory by searching in common locations ie. `./src/migrations`, `./dist/migrations`, `./migrations`, etc.
+
+All database adapters should implement similar migration patterns, but there will be small differences based on the
+adapter and its specific needs. Below is a list of all migration commands that should be supported by your database
+adapter.
+
+## Commands
 
 ### Migrate
 
@@ -58,7 +74,8 @@ npm run payload migrate
 
 ### Create
 
-Create a new migration file in the migrations directory. You can optionally name the migration that will be created. By default, migrations will be named using a timestamp.
+Create a new migration file in the migrations directory. You can optionally name the migration that will be created. By
+default, migrations will be named using a timestamp.
 
 ```text
 npm run payload migrate:create optional-name-here
@@ -66,7 +83,8 @@ npm run payload migrate:create optional-name-here
 
 ### Status
 
-The `migrate:status` command will check the status of migrations and output a table of which migrations have been run, and which migrations have not yet run.
+The `migrate:status` command will check the status of migrations and output a table of which migrations have been run,
+and which migrations have not yet run.
 
 `payload migrate:status`
 

docs/database/mongodb.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ desc: Payload has supported MongoDB natively since we started. The flexible natu
 keywords: MongoDB, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-To use Payload with MongoDB, install the package `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`. It will come with everything you need to store your Payload data in MongoDB.
+To use Payload with MongoDB, install the package `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`. It will come with everything you need to
+store your Payload data in MongoDB.
 
 Then from there, pass it to your Payload config as follows:
 
@@ -29,18 +30,21 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ### Options
 
-| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| `autoPluralization`   | Tell Mongoose to auto-pluralize any collection names if it encounters any singular words used as collection `slug`s.  |
-| `connectOptions`      | Customize MongoDB connection options. Payload will connect to your MongoDB database using default options which you can override and extend to include all the [options](https://mongoosejs.com/docs/connections.html#options) available to mongoose. |
-| `migrationDir`        | Customize the directory that migrations are stored. |
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+|----------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `autoPluralization`  | Tell Mongoose to auto-pluralize any collection names if it encounters any singular words used as collection `slug`s.                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| `connectOptions`     | Customize MongoDB connection options. Payload will connect to your MongoDB database using default options which you can override and extend to include all the [options](https://mongoosejs.com/docs/connections.html#options) available to mongoose.                                         |
+| `disableIndexHints`  | Set to true to disable hinting to MongoDB to use 'id' as index. This is currently done when counting documents for pagination, as it increases the speed of the count function used in that query. Disabling this optimization might fix some problems with AWS DocumentDB. Defaults to false |
+| `migrationDir`       | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| `transactionOptions` | An object with configuration properties used in [transactions](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/core/transactions/) or `false` which will disable the use of transactions.                                                                                                                 |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
 
 ### Access to Mongoose models
 
-After Payload is initialized, this adapter exposes all of your Mongoose models and they are available for you to work with directly.
+After Payload is initialized, this adapter exposes all of your Mongoose models and they are available for you to work
+with directly.
 
 You can access Mongoose models as follows:
 
 - Collection models - `payload.db.collections[myCollectionSlug]`
 - Globals model - `payload.db.globals`
-- Versions model (both collections and globals) - `payload.db.versions[myEntitySlug]`
+- Versions model (both collections and globals) - `payload.db.versions[myEntitySlug]`

docs/database/postgres.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: Postgres
 label: Postgres
 order: 50
-desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle database adapter. 
+desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle database adapter.
 keywords: Postgres, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
@@ -37,11 +37,18 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ### Options
 
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `pool`            | [Pool connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/quick-postgresql/node-postgres) that will be passed to Drizzle and `node-postgres`.                                      |
-| `push`            | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only. |
-| `migrationDir`    | Customize the directory that migrations are stored. |
+| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+|-----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `pool` \*             | [Pool connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/quick-postgresql/node-postgres) that will be passed to Drizzle and `node-postgres`.                                                           |
+| `push`                | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only.                      |
+| `migrationDir`        | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                                                   |
+| `logger`              | The instance of the logger to be passed to drizzle. By default Payload's will be used.                                                                                                                |
+| `schemaName`   | A string for the postgres schema to use, defaults to 'public'.                                                                                                                   |
+| `localesSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                                      |
+| `relationshipsSuffix` | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                                            |
+| `versionsSuffix`      | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                                                   |
+
+
 
 ### Access to Drizzle
 
@@ -65,7 +72,7 @@ In addition to exposing Drizzle directly, all of the tables, Drizzle relations,
 
 Drizzle exposes two ways to work locally in development mode.
 
-The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands. 
+The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
 
 You will be warned if any changes that you make will entail data loss while in development mode. Push is enabled by default, but you can opt out if you'd like.
 
@@ -77,11 +84,11 @@ Migrations are extremely powerful thanks to the seamless way that Payload and Dr
 
 1. You are building your Payload config locally, with a local database used for testing.
 1. You have left the default setting of `push` enabled, so every time you change your Payload config (add or remove fields, collections, etc.), Drizzle will automatically push changes to your local DB.
-1. Once you're done with your changes, or have completed a feature, you can run `npm run payload migrate:create`. 
+1. Once you're done with your changes, or have completed a feature, you can run `npm run payload migrate:create`.
 1. Payload and Drizzle will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate all SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state into the state of your current Payload config, and store the resulting DDL in a newly created migration.
 1. Once you're ready to go to production, you will be able to run `npm run payload migrate` against your production database, which will apply any new migrations that have not yet run.
 1. Now your production database is in sync with your Payload config!
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   Warning: do not mix "push" and migrations with your local development database. If you use "push" locally, and then try to migrate, Payload will throw a warning, telling you that these two methods are not meant to be used interchangeably.
-</Banner>
+</Banner>

docs/database/transactions.mdx

@@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ The initial request made to Payload will begin a new transaction and attach it t
 
 ```ts
 const afterChange: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({ req }) => {
-  // because req.transactionID is assigned from Payload and passed through, my-slug will only persist if the entire request is successful
+  // because req.transactionID is assigned from Payload and passed through,
+  // my-slug will only persist if the entire request is successful
   await req.payload.create({
     req,
     collection: 'my-slug',
@@ -48,7 +49,7 @@ const afterChange: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({ req }) => {
   })
 
   // Should this call fail, it will not rollback other changes
-  // because the req (and its transationID) is not passed through
+  // because the req (and its transactionID) is not passed through
   const safelyIgnoredAsync = req.payload.create({
     collection: 'my-slug',
     data: {
@@ -60,10 +61,44 @@ const afterChange: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({ req }) => {
 
 ### Direct Transaction Access
 
-When writing your own scripts or custom endpoints, you may wish to have direct control over transactions. This is useful for interacting with your database outside of Payload's local API.
+When writing your own scripts or custom endpoints, you may wish to have direct control over transactions. This is useful for interacting with your database in something like a background job, outside the normal request-response flow.
 
 The following functions can be used for managing transactions:
 
-`payload.db.beginTransaction` - Starts a new session and returns a transaction ID for use in other Payload Local API calls.
-`payload.db.commitTransaction` - Takes the identifier for the transaction, finalizes any changes.
-`payload.db.rollbackTransaction` - Takes the identifier for the transaction, discards any changes.
+`payload.db.beginTransaction` - Starts a new session and returns a transaction ID for use in other Payload Local API calls. Note that if your database does not support transactions, this will return `null`.\
+`payload.db.commitTransaction` - Takes the identifier for the transaction, finalizes any changes.\
+`payload.db.rollbackTransaction` - Takes the identifier for the transaction, discards any changes.
+
+You can then use the transaction ID with Payload's local API by passing it inside the `PayloadRequest` object.
+
+Here is an example for a "background job" function, which utilizes the direct transaction API to make sure it either succeeds completely or gets rolled back in case of an error.
+
+```ts
+async function allOrNothingJob() {
+    const req = {} as PayloadRequest;
+    req.transactionID = await payload.db.beginTransaction();
+    try {
+      await payload.create({
+        req, // use our manual transaction
+        collection: 'my-slug',
+        data: {
+          some: 'data'
+        }
+      });
+
+      await payload.create({
+        req, // use our manual transaction
+        collection: 'something-else',
+        data: {
+          some: 'data'
+        }
+      });
+      console.log('Everything done.');
+      if (req.transactionID) await payload.db.commitTransaction(req.transactionID);
+    } catch (e) {
+      console.error('Oh no, something went wrong!');
+      if (req.transactionID) await payload.db.rollbackTransaction(req.transactionID);
+    }
+
+}
+```

docs/email/overview.mdx

@@ -30,16 +30,16 @@ The following options are configurable in the `email` property object as part of
 | **`fromName`** \*        | The name part of the From field that will be seen on the delivered email                                                                                                                     |
 | **`fromAddress`** \*     | The email address part of the From field that will be used when delivering email                                                                                                             |
 | **`transport`**          | The NodeMailer transport object for when you want to do it yourself, not needed when transportOptions is set                                                                                 |
-| **`transportOptions`**   | An object that configures the transporter that Payload will create. For all the available options see the [NodeMailer documentation](https://nodemailer.com/smtp/) or see the examples below |
+| **`transportOptions`**   | An object that configures the transporter that Payload will create. For all the available options see the [NodeMailer documentation](https://nodemailer.com) or see the examples below |
 | **`logMockCredentials`** | If set to true and no transport/transportOptions, ethereal credentials will be logged to console on startup                                                                                  |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Use SMTP
 
-Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, also known as SMTP can be passed in using the `transportOptions` object on the `email` options.
+Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) options can be passed in using the `transportOptions` object on the `email` options. See the [NodeMailer SMTP documentation](https://nodemailer.com/smtp/) for more information, including details on when `secure` should and should not be set to `true`.
 
-**Example email part using SMTP:**
+**Example email options using SMTP:**
 
 ```ts
 payload.init({
@@ -50,12 +50,9 @@ payload.init({
         user: process.env.SMTP_USER,
         pass: process.env.SMTP_PASS,
       },
-      port: 587,
-      secure: true, // use TLS
-      tls: {
-        // do not fail on invalid certs
-        rejectUnauthorized: false,
-      },
+      port: Number(process.env.SMTP_HOST),
+      secure: Number(process.env.SMTP_PORT) === 465, // true for port 465, false (the default) for 587 and others
+      requireTLS: true,
     },
     fromName: 'hello',
     fromAddress: 'hello@example.com',
@@ -71,7 +68,7 @@ payload.init({
 
 ### Use an email service
 
-Many third party mail providers are available and offer benefits beyond basic SMTP. As an example your payload init could look this if you wanted to use SendGrid.com though the same approach would work for any other [NodeMailer transports](https://nodemailer.com/transports/) shown here or provided by another third party.
+Many third party mail providers are available and offer benefits beyond basic SMTP. As an example, your payload init could look like this if you wanted to use SendGrid.com, though the same approach would work for any other [NodeMailer transports](https://nodemailer.com/transports/) shown here or provided by another third party.
 
 ```ts
 import payload from 'payload'

docs/examples/overview.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+---
+title: Examples
+label: Overview
+order: 10
+desc:
+keywords: example, examples, starter, boilerplate, template, templates
+---
+
+Payload provides a vast array of examples to help you get started with your project no matter what you are working on. These examples are designed to be easy to get up and running, and to be easy to understand. They showcase nothing more than the specific features being demonstrated, so you can easily decipher what is going on.
+
+Examples are changing every day, so be sure to check back often to see what new examples have been added. If you have a specific example you would like to see, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.
+
+- [Auth](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth)
+- [Custom Server](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-server)
+- [Draft Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview)
+- [Email](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/email)
+- [Form Builder](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/form-builder)
+- [Hierarchy](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/hierarchy)
+- [Live Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/live-preview)
+- [Multi-tenant](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/multi-tenant)
+- [Nested Docs](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/nested-docs)
+- [Redirects](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/redirects)
+- [Tests](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/testing)
+- [Virtual Fields](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/virtual-fields)
+- [White-label Admin UI](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/whitelabel)
+
+Where necessary, some examples include a front-end. Examples that require a front-end share this folder structure:
+
+```plaintext
+example/
+├── payload/
+├── next-app/
+├── next-pages/
+├── react-router/
+├── vue/
+├── svelte/
+```
+
+Where `payload` is your Payload project, and the other directories are dedicated to their respective front-end framework. We are adding new examples every day, so if your framework of choice is not yet supported in any particular example, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.

docs/fields/array.mdx

@@ -12,22 +12,24 @@ keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array-dark.png"
-  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
+srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array.png"
+srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array-dark.png"
+alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload admin panel"
+caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
 />
 
 **Example uses:**
 
 - A "slider" with an image ([upload field](/docs/fields/upload)) and a caption ([text field](/docs/fields/text))
-- Navigational structures where editors can specify nav items containing pages ([relationship field](/docs/fields/relationship)), an "open in new tab" [checkbox field](/docs/fields/checkbox)
-- Event agenda "timeslots" where you need to specify start & end time ([date field](/docs/fields/date)), label ([text field](/docs/fields/text)), and Learn More page [relationship](/docs/fields/relationship)
+- Navigational structures where editors can specify nav items containing
+  pages ([relationship field](/docs/fields/relationship)), an "open in new tab" [checkbox field](/docs/fields/checkbox)
+- Event agenda "timeslots" where you need to specify start & end time ([date field](/docs/fields/date)),
+  label ([text field](/docs/fields/text)), and Learn More page [relationship](/docs/fields/relationship)
 
 ### Config
 
 | Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+|---------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`label`**         | Text used as the heading in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
 | **`fields`** \*     | Array of field types to correspond to each row of the Array.                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
@@ -45,16 +47,19 @@ keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`interfaceName`** | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
+| **`dbName`**        | Custom table name for the field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Admin Config
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following
+properties:
 
 | Option                    | Description                                                                                                          |
-| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+|---------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | **`initCollapsed`**       | Set the initial collapsed state                                                                                      |
+| **`isSortable`**          | Disable array order sorting by setting this value to `false`                                                               |
 | **`components.RowLabel`** | Function or React component to be rendered as the label on the array row. Receives `({ data, index, path })` as args |
 
 ### Example
@@ -63,6 +68,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 
 ```ts
 import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { RowLabelArgs } from 'payload/dist/admin/components/forms/RowLabel/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -97,7 +103,7 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
       ],
       admin: {
         components: {
-          RowLabel: ({ data, index }) => {
+          RowLabel: ({ data, index }: RowLabelArgs) => {
             return data?.title || `Slide ${String(index).padStart(2, '0')}`
           },
         },

docs/fields/blocks.mdx

@@ -14,22 +14,23 @@ keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks-dark.png"
-  alt="Admin panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
+srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks.png"
+srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks-dark.png"
+alt="Admin panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
+caption="Admin panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
 />
 
 **Example uses:**
 
-- A layout builder tool that grants editors to design highly customizable page or post layouts. Blocks could include configs such as `Quote`, `CallToAction`, `Slider`, `Content`, `Gallery`, or others.
+- A layout builder tool that grants editors to design highly customizable page or post layouts. Blocks could include
+  configs such as `Quote`, `CallToAction`, `Slider`, `Content`, `Gallery`, or others.
 - A form builder tool where available block configs might be `Text`, `Select`, or `Checkbox`.
 - Virtual event agenda "timeslots" where a timeslot could either be a `Break`, a `Presentation`, or a `BreakoutSession`.
 
 ### Field config
 
 | Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+|--------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`label`**        | Text used as the heading in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
 | **`blocks`** \*    | Array of [block configs](/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) to be made available to this field.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
@@ -51,11 +52,13 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Admin Config
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following
+properties:
 
 | Option              | Description                     |
-| ------------------- | ------------------------------- |
+|---------------------|---------------------------------|
 | **`initCollapsed`** | Set the initial collapsed state |
+| **`isSortable`** | Disable block order sorting by setting this value to `false` |
 
 ### Block configs
 
@@ -72,7 +75,7 @@ Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 </Banner>
 
 | Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+|----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | **`slug`** \*              | Identifier for this block type. Will be saved on each block as the `blockType` property.                                                                                            |
 | **`fields`** \*            | Array of fields to be stored in this block.                                                                                                                                         |
 | **`labels`**               | Customize the block labels that appear in the Admin dashboard. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                             |
@@ -80,6 +83,8 @@ Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 | **`imageAltText`**         | Customize this block's image thumbnail alt text.                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`interfaceName`**        | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas). |
 | **`graphQL.singularName`** | Text to use for the GraphQL schema name. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. NOTE: this is set for deprecation, prefer `interfaceName`.                                        |
+| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
+| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                           |
 
 #### Auto-generated data per block
 
@@ -91,7 +96,8 @@ The `blockType` is saved as the slug of the block that has been selected.
 
 **`blockName`**
 
-The Admin panel provides each block with a `blockName` field which optionally allows editors to label their blocks for better editability and readability.
+The Admin panel provides each block with a `blockName` field which optionally allows editors to label their blocks for
+better editability and readability.
 
 ### Example
 
@@ -138,7 +144,8 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 
 ### TypeScript
 
-As you build your own Block configs, you might want to store them in separate files but retain typing accordingly. To do so, you can import and use Payload's `Block` type:
+As you build your own Block configs, you might want to store them in separate files but retain typing accordingly. To do
+so, you can import and use Payload's `Block` type:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Block } from 'payload/types'

docs/fields/date.mdx

@@ -55,6 +55,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 | **`date.maxDate`** \*          | Max date value to allow.                                                                    |
 | **`date.minTime`** \*          | Min time value to allow.                                                                    |
 | **`date.maxTime`** \*          | Max date value to allow.                                                                    |
+| **`date.overrides`** \*        | Pass any valid props directly to the [react-datepicker](https://github.com/Hacker0x01/react-datepicker/blob/master/docs/datepicker.md)     |
 | **`date.timeIntervals`** \*    | Time intervals to display. Defaults to 30 minutes.                                          |
 | **`date.timeFormat`** \*       | Determines time format. Defaults to `'h:mm aa'`.                                            |
 

docs/fields/json.mdx

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ label: JSON
 order: 50
 desc: The JSON field type will store any string in the Database. Learn how to use JSON fields, see examples and options.
 
-keywords: json, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: json, jsonSchema, schema, validation, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -28,8 +28,9 @@ This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
 | **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                              |
 | **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                                             |
 | **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`index`**        | Build a an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                        |
+| **`jsonSchema`**   | Provide a JSON schema that will be used for validation. [JSON schemas](https://json-schema.org/learn/getting-started-step-by-step)                                                                  |
 | **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                       |
 | **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                          |
 | **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                             |
@@ -48,11 +49,11 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 
 | Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`editorOptions`** | Options that can be passed to the monaco editor, [view the full list](https://microsoft.github.io/monaco-editor/api/interfaces/monaco.editor.IDiffEditorConstructionOptions.html). |
+| **`editorOptions`** | Options that can be passed to the monaco editor, [view the full list](https://microsoft.github.io/monaco-editor/typedoc/variables/editor.EditorOptions.html). |
 
 ### Example
 
-`collections/ExampleCollection.ts
+`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
 import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
@@ -68,3 +69,68 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   ],
 }
 ```
+
+### JSON Schema Validation
+
+Payload JSON fields fully support the [JSON schema](https://json-schema.org/) standard. By providing a schema in your field config, the editor will be guided in the admin UI, getting typeahead for properties and their formats automatically. When the document is saved, the default validation will prevent saving any invalid data in the field according to the schema in your config.
+
+If you only provide a URL to a schema, Payload will fetch the desired schema if it is publicly available. If not, it is recommended to add the schema directly to your config or import it from another file so that it can be implemented consistently in your project.
+
+
+#### Local JSON Schema
+
+`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'example-collection',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'customerJSON', // required
+      type: 'json', // required
+      jsonSchema: {
+        uri: 'a://b/foo.json', // required
+        fileMatch: ['a://b/foo.json'], // required
+        schema: {
+          type: 'object',
+          properties: {
+            foo: {
+              enum: ['bar', 'foobar'],
+            }
+          },
+        },
+      },
+
+    },
+  ],
+}
+// {"foo": "bar"} or {"foo": "foobar"} - ok
+// Attempting to create {"foo": "not-bar"} will throw an error
+```
+
+#### Remote JSON Schema
+
+`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'example-collection',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'customerJSON', // required
+      type: 'json', // required
+      jsonSchema: {
+        uri: 'https://example.com/customer.schema.json', // required
+        fileMatch: ['https://example.com/customer.schema.json'], // required
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+// If 'https://example.com/customer.schema.json' has a JSON schema
+// {"foo": "bar"} or {"foo": "foobar"} - ok
+// Attempting to create {"foo": "not-bar"} will throw an error
+```

docs/fields/overview.mdx

@@ -46,6 +46,7 @@ export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
 - [Date](/docs/fields/date) - date / time field that saves a timestamp
 - [Email](/docs/fields/email) - validates the entry is a properly formatted email
 - [Group](/docs/fields/group) - nest fields within an object
+- [JSON](/docs/fields/json) - saves actual JSON in the database
 - [Number](/docs/fields/number) - field that enforces that its value be a number
 - [Point](/docs/fields/point) - geometric coordinates for location data
 - [Radio](/docs/fields/radio) - radio button group, allowing only one value to be selected
@@ -53,6 +54,7 @@ export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
 - [Rich Text](/docs/fields/rich-text) - fully extensible Rich Text editor
 - [Row](/docs/fields/row) - used for admin field layout, no effect on data shape
 - [Select](/docs/fields/select) - dropdown / picklist style value selector
+- [Tabs](/docs/fields/tabs) - used for admin layout, nest fields within tabs
 - [Text](/docs/fields/text) - simple text input
 - [Textarea](/docs/fields/textarea) - allows a bit larger of a text editor
 - [Upload](/docs/fields/upload) - allows local file and image upload
@@ -161,19 +163,21 @@ Example:
 
 In addition to each field's base configuration, you can define specific traits and properties for fields that only have effect on how they are rendered in the Admin panel. The following properties are available for all fields within the `admin` property:
 
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `condition`       | You can programmatically show / hide fields based on what other fields are doing. [Click here](#conditional-logic) for more info.                                                                                                |
-| `components`      | All field components can be completely and easily swapped out for custom components that you define. [Click here](#custom-components) for more info.                                                                             |
-| `description`     | Helper text to display with the field to provide more information for the editor user. [Click here](#description) for more info.                                                                                                 |
-| `position`        | Specify if the field should be rendered in the sidebar by defining `position: 'sidebar'`.                                                                                                                                        |
-| `width`           | Restrict the width of a field. you can pass any string-based value here, be it pixels, percentages, etc. This property is especially useful when fields are nested within a `Row` type where they can be organized horizontally. |
-| `style`           | Attach raw CSS style properties to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                              |
-| `className`       | Attach a CSS class name to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| `readOnly`        | Setting a field to `readOnly` has no effect on the API whatsoever but disables the admin component's editability to prevent editors from modifying the field's value.                                                            |
-| `disabled`        | If a field is `disabled`, it is completely omitted from the Admin panel.                                                                                                                                                         |
-| `disableBulkEdit` | Set `disableBulkEdit` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the select options when making edits for multiple documents.                                                                                                 |
-| `hidden`          | Setting a field's `hidden` property on its `admin` config will transform it into a `hidden` input type. Its value will still submit with the Admin panel's requests, but the field itself will not be visible to editors.        |
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `condition`         | You can programmatically show / hide fields based on what other fields are doing. [Click here](#conditional-logic) for more info.                                                                                                |
+| `components`        | All field components can be completely and easily swapped out for custom components that you define. [Click here](#custom-components) for more info.                                                                             |
+| `description`       | Helper text to display with the field to provide more information for the editor user. [Click here](#description) for more info.                                                                                                 |
+| `position`          | Specify if the field should be rendered in the sidebar by defining `position: 'sidebar'`.                                                                                                                                        |
+| `width`             | Restrict the width of a field. you can pass any string-based value here, be it pixels, percentages, etc. This property is especially useful when fields are nested within a `Row` type where they can be organized horizontally. |
+| `style`             | Attach raw CSS style properties to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                              |
+| `className`         | Attach a CSS class name to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| `readOnly`          | Setting a field to `readOnly` has no effect on the API whatsoever but disables the admin component's editability to prevent editors from modifying the field's value.                                                            |
+| `disabled`          | If a field is `disabled`, it is completely omitted from the Admin panel.                                                                                                                                                         |
+| `disableBulkEdit`   | Set `disableBulkEdit` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the select options when making edits for multiple documents.                                                                                                 |
+| `disableListColumn` | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view column selector.                                                                                                                             |
+| `disableListFilter` | Set `disableListFilter` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view filter options.                                                                                                                              |
+| `hidden`            | Setting a field's `hidden` property on its `admin` config will transform it into a `hidden` input type. Its value will still submit with the Admin panel's requests, but the field itself will not be visible to editors.        |
 
 ### Custom components
 
@@ -250,11 +254,16 @@ const field = {
 
 ### Description
 
-A description can be configured three ways.
+A description can be configured in three ways.
 
 - As a string
-- As a function that accepts an object containing the field's value, which returns a string
-- As a React component that accepts value as a prop
+- As a function which returns a string
+- As a React component
+
+Functions are called with an optional argument object with the following shape, and React components are rendered with the following props:
+
+- `path` - the path of the field
+- `value` - the current value of the field
 
 As shown above, you can simply provide a string that will show by the field, but there are use cases where you may want to create some dynamic feedback. By using a function or a component for the `description` property you can provide realtime feedback as the user interacts with the form.
 
@@ -268,8 +277,8 @@ As shown above, you can simply provide a string that will show by the field, but
       type: 'text',
       maxLength: 20,
       admin: {
-        description: ({ value }) =>
-          `${typeof value === 'string' ? 20 - value.length : '20'} characters left`,
+        description: ({ path, value }) =>
+          `${typeof value === 'string' ? 20 - value.length : '20'} characters left (field: ${path})`,
       },
     },
   ]
@@ -289,11 +298,12 @@ This example will display the number of characters allowed as the user types.
       maxLength: 20,
       admin: {
         description:
-          ({ value }) => (
+          ({ path, value }) => (
             <div>
               Character count:
               {' '}
               { value?.length || 0 }
+               (field: {path})
             </div>
           )
       }
@@ -302,7 +312,7 @@ This example will display the number of characters allowed as the user types.
 }
 ```
 
-This component will count the number of characters entered.
+This component will count the number of characters entered, as well as display the path of the field.
 
 ### TypeScript
 

docs/fields/radio.mdx

@@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                           |
 | **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`enumName`**     | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 

docs/fields/relationship.mdx

@@ -12,10 +12,10 @@ keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Ma
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Relationship field"
+srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship.png"
+srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship-dark.png"
+alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload admin panel"
+caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Relationship field"
 />
 
 **Example uses:**
@@ -26,28 +26,28 @@ keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Ma
 
 ### Config
 
-| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                              |
-| **`relationTo`** \* | Provide one or many collection `slug`s to be able to assign relationships to.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`filterOptions`** | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-relationship-options).                                                                                     |
-| **`hasMany`**       | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many relations instead of only one.                                                                                                       |
-| **`minRows`**       | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                                               |
-| **`maxRows`**       | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                                                 |
-| **`maxDepth`**      | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                                                      |
-| **`label`**         | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                                             |
-| **`unique`**        | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`validate`**      | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                        |
-| **`index`**         | Build a an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**     | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                       |
-| **`hooks`**         | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                          |
-| **`access`**        | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                             |
-| **`hidden`**        | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                                    |
-| **`defaultValue`**  | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                |
-| **`localized`**     | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                                     |
-| **`required`**      | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                                            |
-| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                           |
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                   |
+|---------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                        |
+| **`relationTo`** \* | Provide one or many collection `slug`s to be able to assign relationships to.                                                                                                 |
+| **`filterOptions`** | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-relationship-options).                                                               |
+| **`hasMany`**       | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many relations instead of only one.                                                                                 |
+| **`minRows`**       | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                         |
+| **`maxRows`**       | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                           |
+| **`maxDepth`**      | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                                |
+| **`label`**         | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                       |
+| **`unique`**        | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                  |
+| **`validate`**      | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                  |
+| **`index`**         | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**     | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                 |
+| **`hooks`**         | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                    |
+| **`access`**        | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                       |
+| **`hidden`**        | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                              |
+| **`defaultValue`**  | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                          |
+| **`localized`**     | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                               |
+| **`required`**      | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                      |
+| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                     |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -60,24 +60,79 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Admin config
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Relationship field type also allows for the following admin-specific properties:
+In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Relationship field type also
+allows for the following admin-specific properties:
 
 **`isSortable`**
 
-Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop (only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`).
+Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop (only works when `hasMany`
+is set to `true`).
 
 **`allowCreate`**
 
-Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to create new documents from within the relationship field (hides the "Add new" button in the admin UI).
+Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to create new documents from within the relationship field (hides
+the "Add new" button in the admin UI).
+
+**`sortOptions`**
+
+The `sortOptions` property allows you to define a default sorting order for the options within a Relationship field's
+dropdown. This can be particularly useful for ensuring that the most relevant options are presented first to the user.
+
+You can specify `sortOptions` in two ways:
+
+**As a string:**
+
+Provide a string to define a global default sort field for all relationship field dropdowns across different
+collections. You can prefix the field name with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.
+
+Example:
+
+```ts
+sortOptions: 'fieldName',
+```
+
+This configuration will sort all relationship field dropdowns by `"fieldName"` in ascending order.
+
+**As an object :**
+
+Specify an object where keys are collection slugs and values are strings representing the field names to sort by. This
+allows for different sorting fields for each collection's relationship dropdown.
+
+Example:
+
+```ts
+sortOptions: {
+  "pages"
+:
+  "fieldName1",
+    "posts"
+:
+  "-fieldName2",
+    "categories"
+:
+  "fieldName3"
+}
+```
+
+In this configuration:
+
+- Dropdowns related to `pages` will be sorted by `"fieldName1"` in ascending order.
+- Dropdowns for `posts` will use `"fieldName2"` for sorting in descending order (noted by the "-" prefix).
+- Dropdowns associated with `categories` will sort based on `"fieldName3"` in ascending order.
+
+Note: If `sortOptions` is not defined, the default sorting behavior of the Relationship field dropdown will be used.
 
 ### Filtering relationship options
 
-Options can be dynamically limited by supplying a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview), which will be used both for validating input and filtering available relationships in the UI.
+Options can be dynamically limited by supplying a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview), which will be used both
+for validating input and filtering available relationships in the UI.
 
-The `filterOptions` property can either be a `Where` query directly, or a function (synchronous or asynchronous) that returns one. When using a function, it will be called with an argument object containing the following properties:
+The `filterOptions` property can either be a `Where` query, or a function returning `true` to not filter, `false` to
+prevent all, or a `Where` query. When using a function, it will be
+called with an argument object with the following properties:
 
 | Property      | Description                                                                          |
-| ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
+|---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | `relationTo`  | The `relationTo` to filter against (as defined on the field)                         |
 | `data`        | An object of the full collection or global document currently being edited           |
 | `siblingData` | An object of the document data limited to fields within the same parent to the field |
@@ -128,16 +183,21 @@ You can learn more about writing queries [here](/docs/queries/overview).
 
 ### How the data is saved
 
-Given the variety of options possible within the `relationship` field type, the shape of the data needed for creating and updating these fields can vary. The following sections will describe the variety of data shapes that can arise from this field.
+Given the variety of options possible within the `relationship` field type, the shape of the data needed for creating
+and updating these fields can vary. The following sections will describe the variety of data shapes that can arise from
+this field.
 
 #### Has One
 
-The most simple pattern of a relationship is to use `hasMany: false` with a `relationTo` that allows for only one type of collection.
+The most simple pattern of a relationship is to use `hasMany: false` with a `relationTo` that allows for only one type
+of collection.
 
 ```ts
 {
   slug: 'example-collection',
-  fields: [
+    fields
+:
+  [
     {
       name: 'owner', // required
       type: 'relationship', // required
@@ -163,12 +223,15 @@ When querying documents in this collection via REST API, you could query as foll
 
 #### Has One - Polymorphic
 
-Also known as **dynamic references**, in this configuration, the `relationTo` field is an array of Collection slugs that tells Payload which Collections are valid to reference.
+Also known as **dynamic references**, in this configuration, the `relationTo` field is an array of Collection slugs that
+tells Payload which Collections are valid to reference.
 
 ```ts
 {
   slug: 'example-collection',
-  fields: [
+    fields
+:
+  [
     {
       name: 'owner', // required
       type: 'relationship', // required
@@ -207,7 +270,9 @@ The `hasMany` tells Payload that there may be more than one collection saved to
 ```ts
 {
   slug: 'example-collection',
-  fields: [
+    fields
+:
+  [
     {
       name: 'owners', // required
       type: 'relationship', // required
@@ -222,7 +287,10 @@ To save the to `hasMany` relationship field we need to send an array of IDs:
 
 ```json
 {
-  "owners": ["6031ac9e1289176380734024", "602c3c327b811235943ee12b"]
+  "owners": [
+    "6031ac9e1289176380734024",
+    "602c3c327b811235943ee12b"
+  ]
 }
 ```
 
@@ -235,7 +303,9 @@ When querying documents, the format does not change for arrays:
 ```ts
 {
   slug: 'example-collection',
-  fields: [
+    fields
+:
+  [
     {
       name: 'owners', // required
       type: 'relationship', // required
@@ -247,7 +317,8 @@ When querying documents, the format does not change for arrays:
 }
 ```
 
-Relationship fields with `hasMany` set to more than one kind of collections save their data as an array of objects—each containing the Collection `slug` as the `relationTo` value, and the related document `id` for the `value`:
+Relationship fields with `hasMany` set to more than one kind of collections save their data as an array of objects—each
+containing the Collection `slug` as the `relationTo` value, and the related document `id` for the `value`:
 
 ```json
 {
@@ -267,3 +338,29 @@ Relationship fields with `hasMany` set to more than one kind of collections save
 Querying is done in the same way as the earlier Polymorphic example:
 
 `?where[owners.value][equals]=6031ac9e1289176380734024`.
+
+#### Querying and Filtering Polymorphic Relationships
+
+Polymorphic and non-polymorphic relationships must be queried differently because of how the related data is stored and
+may be inconsistent across different collections. Because of this, filtering polymorphic relationship fields from the
+Collection List admin UI is limited to the `id` value.
+
+For a polymorphic relationship, the response will always be an array of objects. Each object will contain
+the `relationTo` and `value` properties.
+
+The data can be queried by the related document ID:
+
+`?where[field.value][equals]=6031ac9e1289176380734024`.
+
+Or by the related document Collection slug:
+
+`?where[field.relationTo][equals]=your-collection-slug`.
+
+However, you **cannot** query on any field values within the related document.
+Since we are referencing multiple collections, the field you are querying on may not exist and break the query.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  You <strong>cannot</strong> query on a field within a polymorphic relationship as you would with a non-polymorphic relationship.
+</Banner>

docs/fields/select.mdx

@@ -12,32 +12,34 @@ keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Select field"
+srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select.png"
+srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select-dark.png"
+alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload admin panel"
+caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Select field"
 />
 
 ### Config
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                              |
-| **`options`** \*   | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                                           |
-| **`hasMany`**      | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                                                      |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                                             |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                        |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                       |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                          |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                             |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                                    |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                                     |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                                            |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                           |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                   |
+|--------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                        |
+| **`options`** \*   | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                     |
+| **`hasMany`**      | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                                |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                       |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                  |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                  |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.   |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                 |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                    |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                       |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                              |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                          |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                               |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                      |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                     |
+| **`enumName`**     | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                               |
+| **`dbName`**       | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined. |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -52,7 +54,8 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Admin config
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Select field type also allows for the following admin-specific properties:
+In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Select field type also allows
+for the following admin-specific properties:
 
 **`isClearable`**
 
@@ -60,7 +63,8 @@ Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be clearable within the Admin UI.
 
 **`isSortable`**
 
-Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop. (Only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`)
+Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop. (Only works
+when `hasMany` is set to `true`)
 
 ### Example
 
@@ -101,7 +105,8 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 
 ### Customization
 
-The Select field UI component can be customized by providing a custom React component to the `components` object in the Base config.
+The Select field UI component can be customized by providing a custom React component to the `components` object in the
+Base config.
 
 ```ts
 export const CustomSelectField: Field = {
@@ -133,7 +138,7 @@ import * as React from 'react';
 import { SelectInput, useField } from 'payload/components/forms';
 import { useAuth } from 'payload/components/utilities';
 
-type customSelectProps = {
+type CustomSelectProps = {
   path: string;
   options: {
     label: string;
@@ -156,27 +161,33 @@ export const CustomSelectComponent: React.FC<CustomSelectProps> = ({ path, optio
 
   return (
     <div>
-      <label className="field-label">
-        Custom Select
-      </label>
-      <SelectInput
-        path={path}
-        name={path}
-        options={adjustedOptions}
-        value={value}
-        onChange={() => setValue(e.value)}
-      />
-    </div>
-  )
+      <label className = "field-label" >
+      Custom
+  Select
+  < /label>
+  < SelectInput
+  path = { path }
+  name = { path }
+  options = { adjustedOptions }
+  value = { value }
+  onChange = {(e)
+=>
+  setValue(e.value)
+}
+  />
+  < /div>
+)
 }
 ```
 
-If you are looking to create a dynamic select field, the following tutorial will walk you through the process of creating a custom select field that fetches its options from an external API.
+If you are looking to create a dynamic select field, the following tutorial will walk you through the process of
+creating a custom select field that fetches its options from an external API.
 
 <VideoDrawer
- id='Efn9OxSjA6Y'
- label='How to Create a Custom Select Field'
- drawerTitle='How to Create a Custom Select Field: A Step-by-Step Guide'
+id='Efn9OxSjA6Y'
+label='How to Create a Custom Select Field'
+drawerTitle='How to Create a Custom Select Field: A Step-by-Step Guide'
 />
 
-If you want to learn more about custom components check out the [Admin > Custom Component](/docs/admin/components#field-component) docs.
+If you want to learn more about custom components check out
+the [Admin > Custom Component](/docs/admin/components#field-component) docs.

docs/fields/text.mdx

@@ -38,7 +38,9 @@ keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 | **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                           |
 | **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                           |
-
+| **`hasMany`**      | Makes this field an ordered array of text instead of just a single text.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`minRows`**      | Minimum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                                        |
+| **`maxRows`**      | Maximum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                                        |
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ### Admin config

docs/fields/ui.mdx

@@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ With this field, you can also inject custom `Cell` components that appear as add
 | **`label`**                     | Human-readable label for this UI field.                                                                                |
 | **`admin.components.Field`** \* | React component to be rendered for this field within the Edit view. [More](/docs/admin/components/#field-component)    |
 | **`admin.components.Cell`**     | React component to be rendered as a Cell within collection List views. [More](/docs/admin/components/#field-component) |
+| **`admin.disableListColumn`**   | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent the UI field from appearing in the list view column selector.             |
 | **`custom`**                    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                              |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._

docs/fields/upload.mdx

@@ -20,10 +20,10 @@ keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows an upload field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Upload field"
+srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload.png"
+srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload-dark.png"
+alt="Shows an upload field in the Payload admin panel"
+caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Upload field"
 />
 
 **Example uses:**
@@ -34,25 +34,25 @@ keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 
 ### Config
 
-| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*        | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                              |
-| **`*relationTo`** \* | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. <strong>Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.</strong>                                |
-| **`filterOptions`**  | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-upload-options).                                                                                           |
-| **`maxDepth`**       | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                                                      |
-| **`label`**          | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                                             |
-| **`unique`**         | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`validate`**       | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                        |
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+|----------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`name`** \*        | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`*relationTo`** \* | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. <strong>Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.</strong>        |
+| **`filterOptions`**  | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-upload-options).                                                                   |
+| **`maxDepth`**       | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                              |
+| **`label`**          | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**         | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`validate`**       | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**          | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**      | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                       |
-| **`hooks`**          | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                          |
-| **`access`**         | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                             |
-| **`hidden`**         | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                                    |
-| **`defaultValue`**   | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                |
-| **`localized`**      | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                                     |
-| **`required`**       | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| **`admin`**          | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                                            |
-| **`custom`**         | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`saveToJWT`**      | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**          | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**         | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**         | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**   | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**      | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**       | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**          | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
+| **`custom`**         | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -78,12 +78,15 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 
 ### Filtering upload options
 
-Options can be dynamically limited by supplying a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview), which will be used both for validating input and filtering available uploads in the UI.
+Options can be dynamically limited by supplying a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview), which will be used both
+for validating input and filtering available uploads in the UI.
 
-The `filterOptions` property can either be a `Where` query directly, or a function that returns one. When using a function, it will be called with an argument object with the following properties:
+The `filterOptions` property can either be a `Where` query, or a function returning `true` to not filter, `false` to
+prevent all, or a `Where` query. When using a function, it will be
+called with an argument object with the following properties:
 
 | Property      | Description                                                                          |
-| ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
+|---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | `relationTo`  | The `relationTo` to filter against (as defined on the field)                         |
 | `data`        | An object of the full collection or global document currently being edited           |
 | `siblingData` | An object of the document data limited to fields within the same parent to the field |

docs/getting-started/installation.mdx

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms,
 
 Payload requires the following software:
 
-- Yarn or NPM
+- Any JavaScript package manager (Yarn, NPM, or pnpm)
 - Node.js version 16+
 - Any [compatible database](/docs/database/overview) (MongoDB or Postgres)
 
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Payload requires the following software:
 To quickly scaffold a new Payload app in the fastest way possible, you can use [create-payload-app](https://npmjs.com/package/create-payload-app). To do so, run the following command:
 
 ```
-npx create-payload-app
+npx create-payload-app@latest
 ```
 
 Then just follow the prompts! You'll get set up with a new folder and a functioning Payload app inside.

docs/getting-started/what-is-payload.mdx

@@ -11,19 +11,23 @@ keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms,
   title="Payload Introduction - Closing the Gap Between Headless CMS and Application Frameworks"
 />
 
+Payload is a headless CMS and application framework. It's meant to provide a massive boost to your
+development process, but importantly, stay out of your way as your apps get more complex.
+
 <Banner type="success">
-  Payload is a headless CMS and application framework. It’s meant to provide a massive boost to your
-  development process, but importantly, stay out of your way as your apps get more complex.
+  <strong>Payload 2.0 has been released!</strong>
+  <br />
+  Includes Postgres support, Live Preview, Lexical Editor, and more. <a href="/blog/payload-2-0">Read the announcement</a>.
 </Banner>
 
 Out of the box, Payload gives you a lot of the things that you often need when developing a new website, web app, or native app:
 
-- A MongoDB database to store your data
+- A database to store your data (Postgres and MongoDB supported)
 - A way to store, retrieve, and manipulate data of any shape via full REST and GraphQL APIs
 - Authentication—complete with commonly required functionality like registration, email verification, login, & password reset
 - Deep access control to your data, based on document or field-level functions
 - File storage and access control
-- A beautiful admin UI that’s generated specifically to suit your data
+- A beautiful admin UI that's generated specifically to suit your data
 
 ## What does "headless" mean?
 

docs/graphql/overview.mdx

@@ -43,11 +43,12 @@ export const PublicUser: CollectionConfig = {
 
 **Payload will automatically open up the following queries:**
 
-| Query Name         | Operation           |
-| ------------------ | ------------------- |
-| **`PublicUser`**   | `findByID`          |
-| **`PublicUsers`**  | `find`              |
-| **`mePublicUser`** | `me` auth operation |
+| Query Name              | Operation           |
+| ------------------      | ------------------- |
+| **`PublicUser`**        | `findByID`          |
+| **`PublicUsers`**       | `find`              |
+| **`countPublicUsers`**  | `count`             |
+| **`mePublicUser`**      | `me` auth operation |
 
 **And the following mutations:**
 

docs/hooks/collections.mdx

@@ -75,6 +75,7 @@ import { CollectionBeforeOperationHook } from 'payload/types'
 const beforeOperationHook: CollectionBeforeOperationHook = async ({
   args, // original arguments passed into the operation
   operation, // name of the operation
+  req, // full express request
 }) => {
   return args // return modified operation arguments as necessary
 }
@@ -91,7 +92,7 @@ Please do note that this does not run before the client-side validation. If you
 3. `validate` runs on the server
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionBeforeOperationHook } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeValidateHook: CollectionBeforeValidateHook = async ({
   data, // incoming data to update or create with
@@ -209,6 +210,7 @@ import { CollectionAfterOperationHook } from 'payload/types'
 const afterOperationHook: CollectionAfterOperationHook = async ({
   args, // arguments passed into the operation
   operation, // name of the operation
+  req, // full express request
   result, // the result of the operation, before modifications
 }) => {
   return result // return modified result as necessary
@@ -290,13 +292,11 @@ For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after successful `forgotPassword` o
 ```ts
 import { CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook } from 'payload/types'
 
-const afterLoginHook: CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook = async ({
-  req, // full express request
-  user, // user being logged in
-  token, // user token
-}) => {
-  return user
-}
+const afterForgotPasswordHook: CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook = async ({
+  args, // arguments passed into the operation
+  context, 
+  collection, // The collection which this hook is being run on
+}) => {...}
 ```
 
 ## TypeScript

docs/hooks/fields.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ desc: Hooks can be added to any fields, and optionally modify the return value o
 keywords: hooks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Field-level hooks offer incredible potential for encapsulating your logic. They help to isolate concerns and package up functionalities to be easily reusable across your projects.
+Field-level hooks offer incredible potential for encapsulating your logic. They help to isolate concerns and package up
+functionalities to be easily reusable across your projects.
 
 **Example use cases include:**
 
@@ -18,10 +19,10 @@ Field-level hooks offer incredible potential for encapsulating your logic. They
 
 **All field types provide the following hooks:**
 
-- `beforeValidate`
-- `beforeChange`
-- `afterChange`
-- `afterRead`
+- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
+- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
+- [afterChange](#afterchange)
+- [afterRead](#afterread)
 
 ## Config
 
@@ -46,7 +47,8 @@ const ExampleField: Field = {
 
 ## Arguments and return values
 
-All field-level hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based on which field hook you are utilizing.
+All field-level hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based on
+which field hook you are utilizing.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
@@ -62,21 +64,26 @@ All field-level hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some
 Field Hooks receive one `args` argument that contains the following properties:
 
 | Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+|--------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | **`data`**               | The data passed to update the document within `create` and `update` operations, and the full document itself in the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                 |
 | **`siblingData`**        | The sibling data passed to a field that the hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`findMany`**           | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many within the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                                           |
 | **`operation`**          | A string relating to which operation the field type is currently executing within. Useful within `beforeValidate`, `beforeChange`, and `afterChange` hooks to differentiate between `create` and `update` operations. |
 | **`originalDoc`**        | The full original document in `update` operations. In the `afterChange` hook, this is the resulting document of the operation.                                                                                        |
 | **`previousDoc`**        | The document before changes were applied, only in `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`previousSiblingDoc`** | The sibling data from the previous document in `afterChange` hook.                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`previousSiblingDoc`** | The sibling data of the document before changes being applied, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hook.                                                                                                         |
 | **`req`**                | The Express `request` object. It is mocked for Local API operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`value`**              | The value of the field.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`previousValue`**      | The previous value of the field, before changes were applied, only in `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                            |
+| **`previousValue`**      | The previous value of the field, before changes, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                      |
+| **`context`**            | Context passed to this hook. More info can be found under [Context](/docs/hooks/context)                                                                                                                              |
+| **`field`**              | The field which the hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`collection`**         | The collection which the field belongs to. If the field belongs to a global, this will be null.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`global`**             | The global which the field belongs to. If the field belongs to a collection, this will be null.                                                                                                                       |
 
 #### Return value
 
-All field hooks can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. Field Hooks may optionally return the value that should be used within the field.
+All field hooks can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. Field Hooks may
+optionally return the value that should be used within the field.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important</strong>
@@ -86,6 +93,120 @@ All field hooks can optionally modify the return value of the field before the o
   reconsider Field Hooks and instead evaluate if Collection / Global hooks might suit you better.
 </Banner>
 
+## Examples of Field Hooks
+
+To better illustrate how field-level hooks can be applied, here are some specific examples. These demonstrate the
+flexibility and potential of field hooks in different contexts. Remember, these examples are just a starting point - the
+true potential of field-level hooks lies in their adaptability to a wide array of use cases.
+
+### beforeValidate
+
+Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to pre-process or format field data before it undergoes
+validation.
+
+```ts
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+const usernameField: Field = {
+  name: 'username',
+  type: 'text',
+  hooks: {
+    beforeValidate: [({ value }) => {
+      // Trim whitespace and convert to lowercase
+      return value.trim().toLowerCase()
+    }],
+  }
+}
+```
+
+In this example, the `beforeValidate` hook is used to process the `username` field. The hook takes the incoming value of
+the field and transforms it by trimming whitespace and converting it to lowercase. This ensures that the username is
+stored in a consistent format in the database.
+
+### beforeChange
+
+Immediately following validation, `beforeChange` hooks will run within `create` and `update` operations. At this stage,
+you can be confident that the field data that will be saved to the document is valid in accordance to your field
+validations.
+
+```ts
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+const emailField: Field = {
+  name: 'email',
+  type: 'email',
+  hooks: {
+    beforeChange: [({ value, operation }) => {
+      if (operation === 'create') {
+        // Perform additional validation or transformation for 'create' operation
+      }
+      return value
+    }],
+  }
+}
+```
+
+In the `emailField`, the `beforeChange` hook checks the `operation` type. If the operation is `create`, it performs
+additional validation or transformation on the email field value. This allows for operation-specific logic to be applied
+to the field.
+
+### afterChange
+
+The `afterChange` hook is executed after a field's value has been changed and saved in the database. This hook is useful
+for post-processing or triggering side effects based on the new value of the field.
+
+```ts
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+const membershipStatusField: Field = {
+  name: 'membershipStatus',
+  type: 'select',
+  options: [
+    { label: 'Standard', value: 'standard' },
+    { label: 'Premium', value: 'premium' },
+    { label: 'VIP', value: 'vip' }
+  ],
+  hooks: {
+    afterChange: [({ value, previousValue, req }) => {
+      if (value !== previousValue) {
+        // Log or perform an action when the membership status changes
+        console.log(`User ID ${req.user.id} changed their membership status from ${previousValue} to ${value}.`)
+        // Here, you can implement actions that could track conversions from one tier to another
+      }
+    }],
+  }
+}
+```
+
+In this example, the `afterChange` hook is used with a `membershipStatusField`, which allows users to select their
+membership level (Standard, Premium, VIP). The hook monitors changes in the membership status. When a change occurs, it
+logs the update and can be used to trigger further actions, such as tracking conversion from one tier to another or
+notifying them about changes in their membership benefits.
+
+### afterRead
+
+The `afterRead` hook is invoked after a field value is read from the database. This is ideal for formatting or
+transforming the field data for output.
+
+```ts
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+const dateField: Field = {
+  name: 'createdAt',
+  type: 'date',
+  hooks: {
+    afterRead: [({ value }) => {
+      // Format date for display
+      return new Date(value).toLocaleDateString()
+    }],
+  }
+}
+```
+
+Here, the `afterRead` hook for the `dateField` is used to format the date into a more readable format
+using `toLocaleDateString()`. This hook modifies the way the date is presented to the user, making it more
+user-friendly.
+
 ## TypeScript
 
 Payload exports a type for field hooks which can be accessed and used as follows:

docs/hooks/globals.mdx

@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ import { GlobalAfterChangeHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const afterChangeHook: GlobalAfterChangeHook = async ({
   doc, // full document data
-  previousDoc, // document data before updating the collection
+  previousDoc, // document data before updating the global
   req, // full express request
 }) => {
   return data

docs/hooks/overview.mdx

@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ If your Hook simply performs a side-effect, such as updating a CRM, it might be
 
 #### Server-only execution
 
-Payload Hooks do not have any effect within the Payload Admin panel. You can safely [remove your hooks](/docs/admin/webpack#aliasing-server-only-modules) from your Admin panel's code by customizing the Webpack config, which not only keeps your Admin bundles' filesize small but also ensures that any server-side only code does not cause problems within browser environments.
+Payload Hooks are only triggered on the server. You can safely [remove your hooks](/docs/admin/excluding-server-code#aliasing-server-only-modules) from your Admin panel's client-side code by customizing the Webpack config, which not only keeps your Admin bundles' filesize small but also ensures that any server-side only code does not cause problems within browser environments.
 
 ## Hook Types
 

docs/integrations/vercel-content-link.mdx

@@ -1,30 +1,30 @@
 ---
-title: Vercel Visual Editing
-label: Vercel Visual Editing
+title: Vercel Content Link
+label: Vercel Content Link
 order: 10
-desc: Payload + Vercel Visual Editing allows yours editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it.
-keywords: vercel, vercel visual editing, visual editing, content source maps, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Payload + Vercel Content Link allows yours editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it.
+keywords: vercel, vercel content link, visual editing, content source maps, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-[Vercel Visual Editing](https://vercel.com/docs/workflow-collaboration/visual-editing) will allow your editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it. This requires no changes to your front-end code and very few changes to your Payload config.
+[Vercel Content Link](https://vercel.com/docs/workflow-collaboration/edit-mode#content-link) will allow your editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it. This requires no changes to your front-end code and very few changes to your Payload config.
 
 ![Versions](/images/docs/vercel-visual-editing.jpg)
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  Vercel Visual Editing is an enterprise-only feature and only available for deployments hosted on
+  Vercel Content Link is an enterprise-only feature and only available for deployments hosted on
   Vercel. If you are an existing enterprise customer, [contact our sales
   team](https://payloadcms.com/for-enterprise) for help with your integration.
 </Banner>
 
 ### How it works
 
-To power Vercel Visual Editing, Payload embeds Content Source Maps into its API responses. Content Source Maps are invisible, encoded JSON values that include a link back to the field in the CMS that generated the content. When rendered on the page, Vercel detects and decodes these values to display the Visual Editing interface.
+To power Vercel Content Link, Payload embeds Content Source Maps into its API responses. Content Source Maps are invisible, encoded JSON values that include a link back to the field in the CMS that generated the content. When rendered on the page, Vercel detects and decodes these values to display the Content Link interface.
 
 For full details on how the encoding and decoding algorithm works, check out [`@vercel/stega`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@vercel/stega).
 
 ### Getting Started
 
-Setting up Payload with Vercel Visual Editing is easy. First, install the `@payloadcms/plugin-csm` plugin into your project. This plugin requires an API key to install, [contact our sales team](https://payloadcms.com/for-enterprise) if you don't already have one.
+Setting up Payload with Vercel Content Link is easy. First, install the `@payloadcms/plugin-csm` plugin into your project. This plugin requires an API key to install, [contact our sales team](https://payloadcms.com/for-enterprise) if you don't already have one.
 
 ```bash
 npm i @payloadcms/plugin-csm
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ And that's it! You are now ready to enter Edit Mode and begin visually editing y
 
 ##### Edit Mode
 
-To see Visual Editing on your site, you first need to visit any preview deployment on Vercel and login using the Vercel Toolbar. When Content Source Maps are detected on the page, a pencil icon will appear in the toolbar. Clicking this icon will enable Edit Mode, highlighting all editable fields on the page in blue.
+To see Content Link on your site, you first need to visit any preview deployment on Vercel and login using the Vercel Toolbar. When Content Source Maps are detected on the page, a pencil icon will appear in the toolbar. Clicking this icon will enable Edit Mode, highlighting all editable fields on the page in blue.
 
 ![Versions](/images/docs/vercel-toolbar.jpg)
 
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ const { cleaned, encoded } = vercelStegaSplit(text)
 
 ##### Blocks
 
-All `blocks` fields by definition do not have plain text strings to encode. For this reason, blocks are given an additional `encodedSourceMap` key, which you can use to enable Visual Editing on entire sections of your site. You can then specify the editing container by adding the `data-vercel-edit-target` HTML attribute to any top-level element of your block.
+All `blocks` fields by definition do not have plain text strings to encode. For this reason, blocks are given an additional `encodedSourceMap` key, which you can use to enable Content Link on entire sections of your site. You can then specify the editing container by adding the `data-vercel-edit-target` HTML attribute to any top-level element of your block.
 
 ```ts
 <div data-vercel-edit-target>

docs/live-preview/frontend.mdx

@@ -8,15 +8,16 @@ keywords: live preview, frontend, react, next.js, vue, nuxt.js, svelte, hook, us
 
 While using Live Preview, the Admin panel emits a new `window.postMessage` event every time a change is made to the document. Your front-end application can listen for these events and re-render accordingly.
 
-Wiring your front-end into Live Preview is easy. If your front-end application is built with React or Next.js, use the [`useLivePreview`](#react) React hook that Payload provides. In the future, all other major frameworks like Vue, Svelte, etc will be officially supported. If you are using any of these frameworks today, you can still integrate with Live Preview yourself using the underlying tooling that Payload provides. See [building your own hook](#building-your-own-hook) for more information.
+Wiring your front-end into Live Preview is easy. If your front-end application is built with React, Next.js, Vue or Nuxt.js, use the `useLivePreview` hook that Payload provides. In the future, all other major frameworks like Svelte will be officially supported. If you are using any of these frameworks today, you can still integrate with Live Preview yourself using the underlying tooling that Payload provides. See [building your own hook](#building-your-own-hook) for more information.
 
-By default, all hooks require the following args:
+By default, all hooks accept the following args:
 
 | Path                  | Description                                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`serverURL`** \*    | The URL of your Payload server.                                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`initialData`**     | The initial data of the document. The live data will be merged in as changes are made.                                                                                                      |
 | **`depth`**           | The depth of the relationships to fetch. Defaults to `0`.                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`apiRoute`**        | The path of your API route as defined in `routes.api`. Defaults to `/api`.                                                                                                                              |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -31,6 +32,10 @@ And return the following values:
   If your front-end is tightly coupled to required fields, you should ensure that your UI does not break when these fields are removed. For example, if you are rendering something like `data.relatedPosts[0].title`, your page will break once you remove the first related post. To get around this, use conditional logic, optional chaining, or default values in your UI where needed. For example, `data?.relatedPosts?.[0]?.title`.
 </Banner>
 
+<Banner type="info">
+  If is important that the `depth` argument matches exactly with the depth of your initial page request. The depth property is used to populated relationships and uploads beyond their IDs. See [Depth](../getting-started/concepts#depth) for more information.
+</Banner>
+
 ### React
 
 If your front-end application is built with React or Next.js, you can use the `useLivePreview` hook that Payload provides.
@@ -68,9 +73,40 @@ export const PageClient: React.FC<{
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  If is important that the `depth` argument matches exactly with the depth of your initial page request. The depth property is used to populated relationships and uploads beyond their IDs. See [Depth](../getting-started/concepts#depth) for more information.
-</Banner>
+### Vue
+
+If your front-end application is built with Vue 3 or Nuxt 3, you can use the `useLivePreview` composable that Payload provides.
+
+First, install the `@payloadcms/live-preview-vue` package:
+
+```bash
+npm install @payloadcms/live-preview-vue
+```
+
+Then, use the `useLivePreview` hook in your Vue component:
+
+```vue
+<script setup lang="ts">
+import type { PageData } from '~/types';
+import { defineProps } from 'vue';
+import { useLivePreview } from '@payloadcms/live-preview-vue';
+
+// Fetch the initial data on the parent component or using async state
+const props = defineProps<{ initialData: PageData }>();
+
+// The hook will take over from here and keep the preview in sync with the changes you make.
+// The `data` property will contain the live data of the document only when viewed from the Preview view of the Admin UI.
+const { data } = useLivePreview<PageData>({
+  initialData: props.initialData,
+  serverURL: "<PAYLOAD_SERVER_URL>",
+  depth: 2,
+});
+</script>
+
+<template>
+  <h1>{{ data.title }}</h1>
+</template>
+```
 
 ## Building your own hook
 
@@ -186,3 +222,55 @@ For a working demonstration of this, check out the official [Live Preview Exampl
 - [Next.js App Router](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/live-preview/next-app)
 - [Next.js Pages Router](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/live-preview/next-pages)
 
+## Troubleshooting
+
+#### Relationships and/or uploads are not populating
+
+If you are using relationships or uploads in your front-end application, and your front-end application runs on a different domain than your Payload server, you may need to configure [CORS](../configuration/overview) to allow requests to be made between the two domains. This includes sites that are running on a different port or subdomain. Similarly, if you are protecting resources behind user authentication, you may also need to configure [CSRF](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection) to allow cookies to be sent between the two domains. For example:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  // If your site is running on a different domain than your Payload server,
+  // This will allows requests to be made between the two domains
+  cors: {
+    [
+      'http://localhost:3001' // Your front-end application
+    ],
+  },
+  // If you are protecting resources behind user authentication,
+  // This will allow cookies to be sent between the two domains
+  csrf: {
+    [
+      'http://localhost:3001' // Your front-end application
+    ],
+  },
+}
+```
+
+#### Relationships and/or uploads disappear after editing a document
+
+It is possible that either you are setting an improper [`depth`](../getting-started/concepts#depth) in your initial request and/or your `useLivePreview` hook, or they're mismatched. Ensure that the `depth` parameter is set to the correct value, and that it matches exactly in both places. For example:
+
+```tsx
+// Your initial request
+const { docs } = await payload.find({
+  collection: 'pages',
+  depth: 1, // Ensure this is set to the proper depth for your application
+  where: {
+    slug: {
+      equals: 'home',
+    }
+  }
+})
+```
+
+```tsx
+// Your hook
+const { data } = useLivePreview<PageType>({
+  initialData: initialPage,
+  serverURL: PAYLOAD_SERVER_URL,
+  depth: 1, // Ensure this matches the depth of your initial request
+})
+```

docs/live-preview/overview.mdx

@@ -12,6 +12,10 @@ Live Preview works by rendering an iframe on the page that loads your front-end
 
 {/* IMAGE OF LIVE PREVIEW HERE */}
 
+<Banner type="warning">
+  Live Preview is currently in beta. You may use this feature in production, but please be aware that it is subject to change and may not be fully stable for all use cases. If you encounter any issues, please [report them](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=jacobsfletch&labels=possible-bug&projects=&title=Live%20Preview&template=1.bug_report.yml) with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
+
 ## Setup
 
 Setting up Live Preview is easy. You first need to enable it through the `admin.livePreview` property of your Payload config. It takes the following options:

docs/local-api/overview.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,9 @@ desc: The Payload Local API allows you to interact with your database and execut
 keywords: local api, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-The Payload Local API gives you the ability to execute the same operations that are available through REST and GraphQL within Node, directly on your server. Here, you don't need to deal with server latency or network speed whatsoever and can interact directly with your database.
+The Payload Local API gives you the ability to execute the same operations that are available through REST and GraphQL
+within Node, directly on your server. Here, you don't need to deal with server latency or network speed whatsoever and
+can interact directly with your database.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
@@ -30,7 +32,9 @@ You can gain access to the currently running `payload` object via two ways:
 
 ##### Importing it
 
-You can import or require `payload` into your own files after it's been initialized, but you need to make sure that your `import` / `require` statements come **after** you call `payload.init()`—otherwise Payload won't have been initialized yet. That might be obvious. To us, it's usually not.
+You can import or require `payload` into your own files after it's been initialized, but you need to make sure that
+your `import` / `require` statements come **after** you call `payload.init()`—otherwise Payload won't have been
+initialized yet. That might be obvious. To us, it's usually not.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -47,7 +51,8 @@ const afterChangeHook: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async () => {
 
 ##### Accessing from the `req`
 
-Payload is available anywhere you have access to the Express `req` - including within your access control and hook functions.
+Payload is available anywhere you have access to the Express `req` - including within your access control and hook
+functions.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -61,10 +66,11 @@ const afterChangeHook: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({ req: { payload } })
 
 ### Local options available
 
-You can specify more options within the Local API vs. REST or GraphQL due to the server-only context that they are executed in.
+You can specify more options within the Local API vs. REST or GraphQL due to the server-only context that they are
+executed in.
 
 | Local Option       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+|--------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
 | `collection`       | Required for Collection operations. Specifies the Collection slug to operate against.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | `data`             | The data to use within the operation. Required for `create`, `update`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
 | `depth`            | [Control auto-population](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth) of nested relationship and upload fields.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
@@ -158,6 +164,22 @@ const result = await payload.findByID({
 })
 ```
 
+#### Count
+
+```js
+// Result will be an object with:
+// {
+//   totalDocs: 10, // count of the documents satisfies query
+// }
+const result = await payload.count({
+  collection: 'posts', // required
+  locale: 'en',
+  where: {}, // pass a `where` query here
+  user: dummyUser,
+  overrideAccess: false,
+})
+```
+
 #### Update by ID
 
 ```js
@@ -268,7 +290,8 @@ const result = await payload.delete({
 
 ## Auth Operations
 
-If a collection has [`Authentication`](/docs/authentication/overview) enabled, additional Local API operations will be available:
+If a collection has [`Authentication`](/docs/authentication/overview) enabled, additional Local API operations will be
+available:
 
 #### Login
 
@@ -319,10 +342,11 @@ const token = await payload.forgotPassword({
 //   token: 'o38jf0q34jfij43f3f...', // JWT used for auth
 //   user: { ... } // the user document that just logged in
 // }
-const result = await payload.forgotPassword({
+const result = await payload.resetPassword({
   collection: 'users', // required
   data: {
     // required
+    password: req.body.password, // the new password to set
     token: 'afh3o2jf2p3f...', // the token generated from the forgotPassword operation
   },
   req: req, // pass an Express `req` which will be provided to all hooks
@@ -349,7 +373,7 @@ const result = await payload.unlock({
 
 ```js
 // Returned result will be a boolean representing success or failure
-const result = await payload.verify({
+const result = await payload.verifyEmail({
   collection: 'users', // required
   token: 'afh3o2jf2p3f...', // the token saved on the user as `_verificationToken`
 })
@@ -400,6 +424,73 @@ const result = await payload.updateGlobal({
 })
 ```
 
+## Next.js Conflict with Local API
+
+There is a known issue when using the Local API with Next.js version `13.4.13` and higher. Next.js executes within a
+separate child process, and Payload has not been initalized yet in these instances. That means that unless you
+explicitly initialize Payload within your operation, it will not be running and return no data / an empty object.
+
+As a workaround, we recommend leveraging the following pattern to determine and ensure Payload is initalized:
+
+```
+import dotenv from 'dotenv'
+import path from 'path'
+import type { Payload } from 'payload'
+import payload from 'payload'
+import type { InitOptions } from 'payload/config'
+import { seed as seedData } from './seed'
+
+dotenv.config({
+  path: path.resolve(__dirname, '../.env'),
+})
+
+let cached = (global as any).payload
+
+if (!cached) {
+  cached = (global as any).payload = { client: null, promise: null }
+}
+
+interface Args {
+  initOptions?: Partial<InitOptions>
+  seed?: boolean
+}
+
+export const getPayloadClient = async ({ initOptions, seed }: Args = {}): Promise<Payload> => {
+  if (!process.env.DATABASE_URI) {
+    throw new Error('DATABASE_URI environment variable is missing')
+  }
+  if (!process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET) {
+    throw new Error('PAYLOAD_SECRET environment variable is missing')
+  }
+  if (cached.client) {
+    return cached.client
+  }
+  if (!cached.promise) {
+    cached.promise = payload.init({
+      mongoURL: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
+      secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET,
+      local: initOptions?.express ? false : true,
+      ...(initOptions || {}),
+    })
+  }
+  try {
+    process.env.PAYLOAD_DROP_DATABASE = seed ? 'true' : 'false'
+    cached.client = await cached.promise
+    if (seed) {
+      payload.logger.info('---- SEEDING DATABASE ----')
+      await seedData(payload)
+    }
+  } catch (e: unknown) {
+    cached.promise = null
+    throw e
+  }
+  return cached.client
+}
+```
+
+To checkout how this works in a project, take a look at
+our [custom server example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/master/examples/custom-server/src/getPayload.ts).
+
 ## Example Script using Local API
 
 The Local API is especially useful for running scripts

docs/plugins/admin-compatibility.mdx

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Admin panel compatibility
-label: Admin compatibility
-order: 30
-desc: NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN
----
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  COMING SOON: This page is a work in progress. Check back soon for more information.
-</Banner>

docs/plugins/build-your-own.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Building Your Own Plugin
 label: Build Your Own
-order: 20
+order: 50
 desc: Starting to build your own plugin? Find everything you need and learn best practices with the Payload plugin template.
 keywords: plugins, template, config, configuration, extensions, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ If you're starting from scratch, you can easily setup a dev environment lik
 ```
 mkdir dev
 cd dev
-npx create-payload-app
+npx create-payload-app@latest
 ```
 
 If you're using the plugin template, the dev folder is built out for you and the `samplePlugin` has already been installed in `dev/payload.config()`.
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ In the template, we have stubbed out a basic `onInitExtension` file that you can
 
 ### Webpack
 
-If any of your files use server only packages such as fs, stripe, nodemailer, etc, they will need to be removed from the browser bundle. To do that, you can [alias the file imports with webpack](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/webpack#aliasing-server-only-modules).
+If any of your files use server only packages such as fs, stripe, nodemailer, etc, they will need to be removed from the browser bundle. To do that, you can [alias the file imports with webpack](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/excluding-server-code#aliasing-server-only-modules).
 
 When files are bundled for the browser, the import paths are essentially crawled to determine what files to include in the bundle. To prevent the server only files from making it into the bundle, we can alias their import paths to a file that can be included in the browser. This will short-circuit the import path crawling and ensure browser only code is bundled.
 
@@ -290,5 +290,5 @@ If you've configured tests for your package, integrate them into your workf
 The best way to share and allow others to use your plugin once it is complete is to publish an NPM package. This process is straightforward and well documented, find out more about [creating and publishing a NPM package here](https://docs.npmjs.com/creating-and-publishing-scoped-public-packages/).
 ##### Add payload-plugin topic tag:
 Apply the tag **payload-plugin** to your GitHub repository. This will boost the visibility of your plugin and ensure it gets listed with [existing payload plugins](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin).
-##### Use [Semantic Versioning](https://semver.org/) (SemVar):
-With the SemVar system you release version numbers that reflect the nature of changes (major, minor, patch). Ensure all major versions reference their Payload compatibility.
+##### Use [Semantic Versioning](https://semver.org/) (SemVer):
+With the SemVer system you release version numbers that reflect the nature of changes (major, minor, patch). Ensure all major versions reference their Payload compatibility.

docs/plugins/form-builder.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,400 @@
+---
+title: Form Builder Plugin
+label: Form Builder
+order: 20
+desc: Easily build and manage forms from the admin panel. Send dynamic, personalized emails and even accept and process payments.
+keywords: plugins, plugin, form, forms, form builder
+---
+
+[![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder)
+
+This plugin allows you to build and manage custom forms directly within the admin panel. Instead of hard-coding a new form into your website or application every time you need one, admins can simply define the schema for each form they need on-the-fly, and your front-end can map over this schema, render its own UI components, and match your brand's design system.
+
+All form submissions are stored directly in your database and are managed directly from the admin panel. When forms are submitted, you can display a custom on-screen confirmation message to the user or redirect them to a dedicated confirmation page. You can even send dynamic, personalized emails derived from the form's data. For example, you may want to send a confirmation email to the user who submitted the form, and also send a notification email to your team.
+
+Forms can be as simple or complex as you need, from a basic contact form, to a multi-step lead generation engine, or even a donation form that processes payment. You may not need to reach for third-party services like HubSpot or Mailchimp for this, but instead use your own first-party tooling, built directly into your own application.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  This plugin is completely open-source and the [source code can be found here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/plugin-form-builder). If you need help, check out our [Community Help](https://payloadcms.com/community-help). If you think you've found a bug, please [open a new issue](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=&labels=plugin%3A%20form-builder&template=bug_report.md&title=plugin-form-builder%3A) with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
+
+##### Core Features
+
+- Build completely dynamic forms directly from the admin panel for a variety of use cases
+- Render forms on your front-end using your own UI components and match your brand's design system
+- Send dynamic, personalized emails upon form submission to multiple recipients, derived from the form's data
+- Display a custom confirmation message or automatically redirect upon form submission
+- Build dynamic prices based on form input to use for payment processing (optional)
+
+## Installation
+
+Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
+
+```bash
+yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-form-builder
+```
+
+## Basic Usage
+
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import formBuilder from '@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    {
+      slug: 'pages',
+      fields: [],
+    },
+  ],
+  plugins: [
+    formBuilder({
+      // see below for a list of available options
+    })
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+### Options
+
+#### `fields` (option)
+
+The `fields` property is an object of field types to allow your admin editors to build forms with. To override default settings, pass either a boolean value or a partial [Payload Block](https://payloadcms.com/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) _keyed to the block's slug_. See [Fields](#fields) for more details.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+formBuilder({
+  // ...
+  fields: {
+    text: true,
+    textarea: true,
+    select: true,
+    email: true,
+    state: true,
+    country: true,
+    checkbox: true,
+    number: true,
+    message: true,
+    payment: false
+  }
+})
+```
+
+#### `redirectRelationships`
+
+The `redirectRelationships` property is an array of collection slugs that, when enabled, are populated as options in the form's `redirect` field. This field is used to redirect the user to a dedicated confirmation page upon form submission (optional).
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+formBuilder({
+  // ...
+  redirectRelationships: ['pages']
+})
+```
+
+#### `beforeEmail`
+
+The `beforeEmail` property is a [beforeChange](https://payloadcms.com/docs/hooks/globals#beforechange) hook that is called just after emails are prepared, but before they are sent. This is a great place to inject your own HTML template to add custom styles.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+formBuilder({
+  // ...
+  beforeEmail: (emailsToSend) => {
+    // modify the emails in any way before they are sent
+    return emails.map((email) => ({
+      ...email,
+      html: email.html, // transform the html in any way you'd like (maybe wrap it in an html template?)
+    }))
+  }
+})
+```
+
+#### `formOverrides`
+
+Override anything on the `forms` collection by sending a [Payload Collection Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/collections) to the `formOverrides` property.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+formBuilder({
+  // ...
+  formOverrides: {
+    slug: "contact-forms",
+    access: {
+      read: () => true,
+      update: () => false,
+    },
+    fields: [
+      {
+        name: "custom-field",
+        type: "text"
+      }
+    ]
+  }
+})
+```
+
+#### `formSubmissionOverrides`
+
+Override anything on the `form-submissions` collection by sending a [Payload Collection Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/collections) to the `formSubmissionOverrides` property.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  By default, this plugin relies on [Payload access control](https://payloadcms.com/docs/access-control/collections) to restrict the `update` and `read` operations on the `form-submissions` collection. This is because _anyone_ should be able to create a form submission, even from a public-facing website, but _no one_ should be able to update a submission one it has been created, or read a submission unless they have permission. You can override this behavior or any other property as needed.
+</Banner>
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+formBuilder({
+  // ...
+  formSubmissionOverrides: {
+    slug: "leads",
+  }
+})
+```
+
+#### `handlePayment`
+
+The `handlePayment` property is a [beforeChange](<[beforeChange](https://payloadcms.com/docs/hooks/globals#beforechange)>) hook that is called upon form submission. You can integrate into any third-party payment processing API here to accept payment based on form input. You can use the `getPaymentTotal` function to calculate the total cost after all conditions have been applied. This is only applicable if the form has enabled the `payment` field.
+
+First import the utility function. This will execute all of the price conditions that you have set in your form's `payment` field and returns the total price.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+import { getPaymentTotal } from '@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder';
+```
+
+Then in your plugin's config:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+formBuilder({
+  // ...
+  handlePayment: async ({ form, submissionData }) => {
+    // first calculate the price
+    const paymentField =  form.fields?.find((field) => field.blockType === 'payment');
+    const price = getPaymentTotal({
+      basePrice: paymentField.basePrice,
+      priceConditions: paymentField.priceConditions,
+      fieldValues: submissionData,
+    });
+    // then asynchronously process the payment here
+  }
+})
+```
+
+## Fields
+
+Each field represents a form input. To override default settings pass either a boolean value or a partial [Payload Block](https://payloadcms.com/docs/fields/blocks) _keyed to the block's slug_. See [Field Overrides](#field-overrides) for more details on how to do this.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  "Fields" here is in reference to the _fields to build forms with_, not to be confused with the _fields of a collection_ which are set via `formOverrides.fields`.
+</Banner>
+
+#### Text
+
+Maps to a `text` input in your front-end. Used to collect a simple string.
+
+| Property | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | string | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. |
+
+#### Textarea
+
+Maps to a `textarea` input on your front-end. Used to collect a multi-line string.
+
+| Property | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | string | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. |
+
+#### Select
+
+Maps to a `select` input on your front-end. Used to display a list of options.
+
+| Property | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | string | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. |
+| `options` | array | An array of objects with `label` and `value` properties. |
+
+#### Email (field)
+
+Maps to a `text` input with type `email` on your front-end. Used to collect an email address.
+
+| Property | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | string | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. |
+
+#### State
+
+Maps to a `select` input on your front-end. Used to collect a US state.
+
+| Property | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | string | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. |
+
+#### Country
+
+Maps to a `select` input on your front-end. Used to collect a country.
+
+| Property | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | string | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. |
+
+#### Checkbox
+
+Maps to a `checkbox` input on your front-end. Used to collect a boolean value.
+
+| Property | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | checkbox | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. |
+
+#### Number
+
+Maps to a `number` input on your front-end. Used to collect a number.
+
+| Property | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | string | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. || `defaultValue` | number | The default value of the field. |
+
+#### Message
+
+Maps to a `RichText` component on your front-end. Used to display an arbitrary message to the user anywhere in the form.
+
+| property | type | description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `message` | richText | The message to display on the form. |
+
+#### Payment
+
+Add this field to your form if it should collect payment. Upon submission, the `handlePayment` callback is executed with the form and submission data. You can use this to integrate with any third-party payment processing API.
+
+| property | type | description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `name` | string | The name of the field. |
+| `label` | string | The label of the field. |
+| `defaultValue` | number | The default value of the field. |
+| `width` | string | The width of the field on the front-end. |
+| `required` | checkbox | Whether or not the field is required when submitted. |
+| `priceConditions` | array | An array of objects that define the price conditions. See below for more details. |
+
+##### Price Conditions
+
+Each of the `priceConditions` are executed by the `getPaymentTotal` utility that this plugin provides. You can call this function in your `handlePayment` callback to dynamically calculate the total price of a form upon submission based on the user's input. For example, you could create a price condition that says "if the user selects 'yes' for this checkbox, add $10 to the total price".
+
+| property | type | description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `fieldToUse` | relationship | The field to use to determine the price. |
+| `condition` | string | The condition to use to determine the price. |
+| `valueForOperator` | string | The value to use for the operator. |
+| `operator` | string | The operator to use to determine the price. |
+| `valueType` | string | The type of value to use to determine the price. |
+| `value` | string | The value to use to determine the price. |
+
+#### Field Overrides
+
+You can provide your own custom fields by passing a new [Payload Block](https://payloadcms.com/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) object into `fields`. You can override or extend any existing fields by first importing the `fields` from the plugin:
+
+```ts
+import { fields } from '@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder'
+```
+
+Then merging it into your own custom field:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+formBuilder({
+  // ...
+  fields: {
+    text: {
+      ...fields.text,
+      labels: {
+        singular: "Custom Text Field",
+        plural: "Custom Text Fields",
+      }
+    }
+  }
+})
+```
+
+## Email
+
+This plugin relies on the [email configuration](https://payloadcms.com/docs/email/overview) defined in your `payload.init()`. It will read from your config and attempt to send your emails using the credentials provided.
+
+## TypeScript
+
+All types can be directly imported:
+
+```js
+import {
+  PluginConfig,
+  Form,
+  FormSubmission,
+  FieldsConfig,
+  BeforePayment,
+  BeforeEmail,
+  HandlePayment,
+  ...
+} from "@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder/types";
+```
+
+## Examples
+
+The [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) contains an official [Form Builder Plugin Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/form-builder) which demonstrates exactly how to configure this plugin in Payload and implement it on your front-end. We've also included an in-depth walk-through of how to build a form from scratch in our [Form Builder Plugin Blog Post](https://payloadcms.com/blog/create-custom-forms-with-the-official-form-builder-plugin).
+
+## Troubleshooting
+
+Below are some common troubleshooting tips. To help other developers, please contribute to this section as you troubleshoot your own application.
+
+##### SendGrid 403 Forbidden Error
+
+- If you are using [SendGrid Link Branding](https://docs.sendgrid.com/ui/account-and-settings/how-to-set-up-link-branding) to remove the "via sendgrid.net" part of your email, you must also setup [Domain Authentication](https://docs.sendgrid.com/ui/account-and-settings/how-to-set-up-domain-authentication). This means you can only send emails from an address on this domain — so the `from` addresses in your form submission emails **_cannot_** be anything other than `something@your_domain.com`. This means that from `{{email}}` will not work, but `website@your_domain.com` will. You can still send the form's email address in the body of the email.
+
+## Screenshots
+
+![screenshot 1](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-form-builder/blob/main/images/screenshot-1.jpg?raw=true)
+<br />
+![screenshot 2](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-form-builder/blob/main/images/screenshot-2.jpg?raw=true)
+<br />
+![screenshot 3](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-form-builder/blob/main/images/screenshot-3.jpg?raw=true)
+<br />
+![screenshot 4](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-form-builder/blob/main/images/screenshot-4.jpg?raw=true)
+<br />
+![screenshot 5](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-form-builder/blob/main/images/screenshot-5.jpg?raw=true)
+<br />
+![screenshot 6](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-form-builder/blob/main/images/screenshot-6.jpg?raw=true)

docs/plugins/nested-docs.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+---
+title: Nested Docs Plugin
+label: Nested Docs
+order: 20
+desc: Nested documents in a parent, child, and sibling relationship.
+keywords: plugins, nested, documents, parent, child, sibling, relationship
+---
+
+[![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs)
+
+This plugin allows you to easily nest the documents of your application inside of one another. It does so by adding a
+new `parent` field onto each of your documents that, when selected, attaches itself to the parent's tree. When you edit
+the great-great-grandparent of a document, for instance, all of its descendants are recursively updated. This is an
+extremely powerful way of achieving hierarchy within a collection, such as parent/child relationship between pages.
+
+Documents also receive a new `breadcrumbs` field. Once a parent is assigned, these breadcrumbs are populated based on
+each ancestor up the tree. Breadcrumbs allow you to dynamically generate labels and URLs based on the document's
+position in the hierarchy. Even if the slug of a parent document changes, or the entire tree is nested another level
+deep, changes will cascade down the entire tree and all breadcrumbs will reflect those changes.
+
+With this pattern you can perform whatever side-effects your applications needs on even the most deeply nested
+documents. For example, you could easily add a custom `fullTitle` field onto each document and inject the parent's title
+onto it, such as "Parent Title > Child Title". This would allow you to then perform searches and filters based on _that_
+field instead of the original title. This is especially useful if you happen to have two documents with identical titles
+but different parents.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  This plugin is completely open-source and the [source code can be found here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/plugin-nested-docs). If you need help, check out our [Community Help](https://payloadcms.com/community-help). If you think you've found a bug, please [open a new issue](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=&labels=plugin%3A%20nested-docs&template=bug_report.md&title=plugin-nested-docs%3A) with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
+
+##### Core features
+
+- Automatically adds a `parent` relationship field to each document
+- Allows for parent/child relationships between documents within the same collection
+- Recursively updates all descendants when a parent is changed
+- Automatically populates a `breadcrumbs` field with all ancestors up the tree
+- Dynamically generate labels and URLs for each breadcrumb
+- Supports localization
+
+## Installation
+
+Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com),
+or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
+
+```bash
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs
+```
+
+## Basic Usage
+
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin
+with [options](#options):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import nestedDocs from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    {
+      slug: 'pages',
+      fields: [
+        {
+          name: 'title',
+          type: 'text',
+        },
+        {
+          name: 'slug',
+          type: 'text',
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  plugins: [
+    nestedDocs({
+      collections: ['pages'],
+      generateLabel: (_, doc) => doc.title,
+      generateURL: (docs) => docs.reduce((url, doc) => `${url}/${doc.slug}`, ''),
+    }),
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+### Fields
+
+#### Parent
+
+The `parent` relationship field is automatically added to every document which allows editors to choose another document
+from the same collection to act as the direct parent.
+
+#### Breadcrumbs
+
+The `breadcrumbs` field is an array which dynamically populates all parent relationships of a document up to the top
+level and stores the following fields.
+
+| Field   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+|---------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `label` | The label of the breadcrumb. This field is automatically set to either the `collection.admin.useAsTitle` (if defined) or is set to the `ID` of the document. You can also dynamically define the `label` by passing a function to the options property of [`generateLabel`](#generateLabel). |
+| `url`   | The URL of the breadcrumb. By default, this field is undefined. You can manually define this field by passing a property called function to the plugin options property of [`generateURL`](#generateURL).                                                                                    |
+
+### Options
+
+#### `collections`
+
+An array of collections slugs to enable nested docs.
+
+#### `generateLabel`
+
+Each `breadcrumb` has a required `label` field. By default, its value will be set to the collection's `admin.useAsTitle`
+or fallback the the `ID` of the document.
+
+You can also pass a function to dynamically set the `label` of your breadcrumb.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+nestedDocs({
+  //...
+  generateLabel: (_, doc) => doc.title // NOTE: 'title' is a hypothetical field
+})
+```
+
+The function takes two arguments and returns a string:
+
+| Argument | Type     | Description                                  |
+|----------|----------|----------------------------------------------|
+| `docs`   | `Array`  | An array of the breadcrumbs up to that point |
+| `doc`    | `Object` | The current document being edited            |
+
+#### `generateURL`
+
+A function that allows you to dynamically generate each breadcrumb `url`. Each `breadcrumb` has an optional `url` field
+which is undefined by default. For example, you might want to format a full URL to contain all breadcrumbs up to
+that point, like `/about-us/company/our-team`.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+nestedDocs({
+  //...
+  generateURL: (docs) => docs.reduce((url, doc) => `${url}/${doc.slug}`, ''), // NOTE: 'slug' is a hypothetical field
+})
+```
+
+| Argument | Type     | Description                                  |
+|----------|----------|----------------------------------------------|
+| `docs`   | `Array`  | An array of the breadcrumbs up to that point |
+| `doc`    | `Object` | The current document being edited            |
+
+#### `parentFieldSlug`
+
+When defined, the `parent` field will not be provided for you automatically, and instead, expects you to add your
+own `parent` field to each collection manually. This gives you complete control over where you put the field in your
+admin dashboard, etc. Set this property to the `name` of your custom field.
+
+#### `breadcrumbsFieldSlug`
+
+When defined, the `breadcrumbs` field will not be provided for you, and instead, expects you to add your
+own `breadcrumbs` field to each collection manually. Set this property to the `name` of your custom field.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  If you opt out of automatically being provided a `parent` or `breadcrumbs` field, you need to make sure that both fields are placed at the top-level of your document. They cannot exist within any nested data structures like a `group`, `array`, or `blocks`.
+</Banner>
+
+## Overrides
+
+You can also extend the built-in `parent` and `breadcrumbs` fields per collection by using the `createParentField`
+and `createBreadcrumbField` methods. They will merge your customizations overtop the plugin's base field configurations.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from "payload/types";
+import { createParentField } from "@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs/fields";
+import { createBreadcrumbsField } from "@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs/fields";
+
+const examplePageConfig: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: "pages",
+  fields: [
+    createParentField(
+      // First argument is equal to the slug of the collection
+      // that the field references
+      "pages",
+
+      // Second argument is equal to field overrides that you specify,
+      // which will be merged into the base parent field config
+      {
+        admin: {
+          position: "sidebar",
+        },
+        // Note: if you override the `filterOptions` of the `parent` field,
+        // be sure to continue to prevent the document from referencing itself as the parent like this:
+        // filterOptions: ({ id }) => ({ id: {not_equals: id }})`
+      }
+    ),
+    createBreadcrumbsField(
+      // First argument is equal to the slug of the collection
+      // that the field references
+      "pages",
+
+      // Argument equal to field overrides that you specify,
+      // which will be merged into the base `breadcrumbs` field config
+      {
+        label: "Page Breadcrumbs",
+      }
+    ),
+  ],
+};
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  If overriding the `name` of either `breadcrumbs` or `parent` fields, you must specify the `breadcrumbsFieldSlug` or `parentFieldSlug` respectively.
+</Banner>
+
+## Localization
+
+This plugin supports localization by default. If the `localization` property is set in your Payload config,
+the `breadcrumbs` field is automatically localized. For more details on how localization works in Payload, see
+the [Localization](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/localization) docs.
+
+## TypeScript
+
+All types can be directly imported:
+
+```ts
+import { PluginConfig, GenerateURL, GenerateLabel } from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs/types'
+```
+
+## Examples
+
+The [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) contains an
+official [Nested Docs Plugin Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/nested-docs) which
+demonstrates exactly how to configure this plugin in Payload and implement it on your front-end.
+The [Templates Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) also contains an
+official [Website Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/website)
+and [E-commerce Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/ecommerce), both of which use this
+plugin.

docs/plugins/redirects.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+---
+title: Redirects Plugin
+label: Redirects
+order: 20
+desc: Automatically create redirects for your Payload application
+keywords: plugins, redirects, redirect, plugin, payload, cms, seo, indexing, search, search engine
+---
+
+[![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-redirects)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-redirects)
+
+This plugin allows you to easily manage redirects for your application from within your admin panel. It does so by adding a `redirects` collection to your config that allows you specify a redirect from one URL to another. Your front-end application can use this data to automatically redirect users to the correct page using proper HTTP status codes. This is useful for SEO, indexing, and search engine ranking when re-platforming or when changing your URL structure.
+
+For example, if you have a page at `/about` and you want to change it to `/about-us`, you can create a redirect from the old page to the new one, then you can use this data to write HTTP redirects into your front-end application. This will ensure that users are redirected to the correct page without penalty because search engines are notified of the change at the request level. This is a very lightweight plugin that will allow you to integrate managed redirects for any front-end framework.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  This plugin is completely open-source and the [source code can be found here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/plugin-redirects). If you need help, check out our [Community Help](https://payloadcms.com/community-help). If you think you've found a bug, please [open a new issue](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=&labels=plugin%3A%25redirects&template=bug_report.md&title=plugin-redirects%3A) with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
+
+##### Core features
+
+- Adds a `redirects` collection to your config that:
+  - includes a `from` and `to` fields
+  - allows `to` to be a document reference
+
+## Installation
+
+Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
+
+```bash
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-redirects
+```
+
+## Basic Usage
+
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from "payload/config";
+import redirects from "@payloadcms/plugin-redirects";
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    {
+      slug: "pages",
+      fields: [],
+    },
+  ],
+  plugins: [
+    redirects({
+      collections: ["pages"],
+    }),
+  ],
+});
+
+export default config;
+```
+
+### Options
+
+| Option | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `collections` | `string[]` | An array of collection slugs to populate in the `to` field of each redirect. |
+| `overrides` | `object` | A partial collection config that allows you to override anything on the `redirects` collection. |
+
+## TypeScript
+
+All types can be directly imported:
+
+```ts
+import { PluginConfig } from "@payloadcms/plugin-redirects/types";
+```
+
+## Examples
+
+The [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) contains an official [Redirects Plugin Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/redirects) which demonstrates exactly how to configure this plugin in Payload and implement it on your front-end. The [Templates Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) also contains an official [Website Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/website) and [E-commerce Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/ecommere), both of which use this plugin.

docs/plugins/search.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+---
+title: Search Plugin
+label: Search
+order: 20
+desc: Generates records of your documents that are extremely fast to search on.
+keywords: plugins, search, search plugin, search engine, search index, search results, search bar, search box, search field, search form, search input
+---
+
+[![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-search)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-search)
+
+This plugin generates records of your documents that are extremely fast to search on. It does so by creating a new `search` collection that is indexed in the database then saving a static copy of each of your documents using only search-critical data. Search records are automatically created, synced, and deleted behind-the-scenes as you manage your application's documents.
+
+For example, if you have a posts collection that is extremely large and complex, this would allow you to sync just the title, excerpt, and slug of each post so you can query on _that_ instead of the original post directly. Search records are static, so querying them also has the significant advantage of bypassing any hooks that may present be on the original documents. You define exactly what data is synced, and you can even modify or fallback this data before it is saved on a per-document basis.
+
+To query search results, use all the existing Payload APIs that you are already familiar with. You can also prioritize search results by setting a custom priority for each collection. For example, you may want to list blog posts before pages. Or you may want one specific post to always take appear first. Search records are given a `priority` field that can be used as the `?sort=` parameter in your queries.
+
+This plugin is a great way to implement a fast, immersive search experience such as a search bar in a front-end application. Many applications may not need the power and complexity of a third-party service like Algolia or ElasticSearch. This plugin provides a first-party alternative that is easy to set up and runs entirely on your own database.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  This plugin is completely open-source and the [source code can be found here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/plugin-search). If you need help, check out our [Community Help](https://payloadcms.com/community-help). If you think you've found a bug, please [open a new issue](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=&labels=plugin%3A%20search&template=bug_report.md&title=plugin-search%3A) with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
+
+##### Core Features
+
+- Automatically adds an indexed `search` collection to your database
+- Automatically creates, syncs, and deletes search records as you manage your documents
+- Saves only search-critical data that you define (e.g. title, excerpt, etc.)
+- Allows you to query search results using first-party Payload APIs
+- Allows you to query documents without triggering any of their underlying hooks
+- Allows you to easily prioritize search results by collection or document
+
+## Installation
+
+Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
+
+```bash
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-search
+```
+
+## Basic Usage
+
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+
+```js
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import search from '@payloadcms/plugin-search'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    {
+      slug: 'pages',
+      fields: [],
+    },
+    {
+      slug: 'posts',
+      fields: [],
+    },
+  ],
+  plugins: [
+    search({
+      collections: ['pages', 'posts'],
+      defaultPriorities: {
+        pages: 10,
+        posts: 20,
+      },
+    }),
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+### Options
+
+#### `collections`
+
+The `collections` property is an array of collection slugs to enable syncing to search. Enabled collections receive a `beforeChange` and `afterDelete` hook that creates, updates, and deletes its respective search record as it changes over time.
+
+#### `defaultPriorities`
+
+This plugin automatically adds a `priority` field to the `search` collection that can be used as the `?sort=` parameter in your queries. For example, you may want to list blog posts before pages. Or you may want one specific post to always take appear first.
+
+The `defaultPriorities` property is used to set a fallback `priority` on search records during the `create` operation. It accepts an object with keys that are your collection slugs and values that can either be a number or a function that returns a number. The function receives the `doc` as an argument, which is the document being created.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  searchPlugin({
+    defaultPriorities: {
+      pages: ({ doc }) => (doc.title.startsWith('Hello, world!') ? 1 : 10),
+      posts: 20,
+    },
+  }),
+}
+```
+
+#### `searchOverrides`
+
+This plugin automatically creates the `search` collection, but you can override anything on this collection via the `searchOverrides` property. It accepts anything from the [Payload Collection Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/collections) and merges it in with the default `search` collection config provided by the plugin.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  searchPlugin({
+    searchOverrides: {
+      slug: 'search-results',
+    },
+  }),
+}
+```
+
+#### `beforeSync`
+
+Before creating or updating a search record, the `beforeSync` function runs. This is an [afterChange](https://payloadcms.com/docs/hooks/globals#afterchange) hook that allows you to modify the data or provide fallbacks before its search record is created or updated.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  searchPlugin({
+    beforeSync: ({ originalDoc, searchDoc }) => ({
+      ...searchDoc,
+      // Modify your docs in any way here, this can be async
+      excerpt: originalDoc?.excerpt || 'This is a fallback excerpt',
+    }),
+  }),
+}
+```
+
+#### `syncDrafts`
+
+When `syncDrafts` is true, draft documents will be synced to search. This is false by default. You must have [Payload Drafts](https://payloadcms.com/docs/versions/drafts) enabled for this to apply.
+
+#### `deleteDrafts`
+
+If true, will delete documents from search whose status changes to draft. This is true by default. You must have [Payload Drafts](https://payloadcms.com/docs/versions/drafts) enabled for this to apply.
+
+## TypeScript
+
+All types can be directly imported:
+
+```ts
+import type { SearchConfig, BeforeSync } from '@payloadcms/plugin-search/types'
+```

docs/plugins/sentry.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+---
+title: Sentry Plugin
+label: Sentry
+order: 20
+desc: Integrate Sentry error tracking into your Payload application
+keywords: plugins, sentry, error, tracking, monitoring, logging, bug, reporting, performance
+---
+
+[![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-sentry)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-sentry)
+
+This plugin allows you to integrate [Sentry](https://sentry.io/) seamlessly with your [Payload](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload) application.
+
+### What is Sentry?
+
+Sentry is a powerful error tracking and performance monitoring tool that helps developers identify, diagnose, and resolve issues in their applications.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  Sentry does smart stuff with error data to make bugs easier to find and fix. - [sentry.io](https://sentry.io/)
+</Banner>
+
+This multi-faceted software offers a range of features that will help you manage errors with greater ease and ultimately ensure your application is running smoothly:
+
+#### Core Features
+
+- **Error Tracking**: Instantly captures and logs errors as they occur in your application
+- **Performance Monitoring**: Tracks application performance to identify slowdowns and bottlenecks
+- **Detailed Reports**: Provides comprehensive insights into errors, including stack traces and context
+- **Alerts and Notifications**: Send and customize event-triggered notifications
+- **Issue Grouping, Filtering and Search**: Automatically groups similar errors, and allows filtering and searching issues by custom criteria
+- **Breadcrumbs**: Records user actions and events leading up to an error
+- **Integrations**: Connects with various tools and services for enhanced workflow and issue management
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  This plugin is completely open-source and the [source code can be found here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/plugin-sentry). If you need help, check out our [Community Help](https://payloadcms.com/community-help). If you think you've found a bug, please [open a new issue](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=&labels=plugin%3A%20seo&template=bug_report.md&title=plugin-seo%3A) with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
+
+## Installation
+
+Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
+
+```bash
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-sentry
+```
+
+## Basic Usage
+
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin and pass in your Sentry DSN as an option.
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { sentry } from '@payloadcms/plugin-sentry'
+import { Pages, Media } from './collections'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  collections: [Pages, Media],
+  plugins: [
+    sentry({
+      dsn: 'https://61edebas776889984d323d777@o4505289711681536.ingest.sentry.io/4505357433352176',
+    }),
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+## Options
+
+- `dsn` : string | **required**
+
+  Sentry automatically assigns a DSN when you create a project, the unique DSN informs Sentry where to send events so they are associated with the correct project.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  You can find your project DSN (Data Source Name) by visiting [sentry.io](sentry.io) and navigating to your [Project] > Settings > Client Keys (DSN).
+</Banner>
+
+- `enabled`: boolean | optional
+
+  Set to false to disable the plugin. Defaults to true.
+
+- `init` : ClientOptions | optional
+
+  Sentry allows a variety of options to be passed into the Sentry.init() function, see the full list of options [here](https://docs.sentry.io/platforms/node/guides/express/configuration/options).
+
+- `requestHandler` : RequestHandlerOptions | optional
+
+  Accepts options that let you decide what data should be included in the event sent to Sentry, checkout the options [here](https://docs.sentry.io/platforms/node/guides/express/configuration/options).
+
+- `captureErrors`: number[] | optional
+
+  By default, `Sentry.errorHandler` will capture only errors with a status code of 500 or higher. To capture additional error codes, pass the values as numbers in an array.
+
+To see all options available, visit the [Sentry Docs](https://docs.sentry.io/platforms/node/guides/express/configuration/options).
+
+### Example
+
+Configure any of these options by passing them to the plugin:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { sentry } from '@payloadcms/plugin-sentry'
+import { Pages, Media } from './collections'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  collections: [Pages, Media],
+  plugins: [
+    sentry({
+      dsn: 'https://61edebas777689984d323d777@o4505289711681536.ingest.sentry.io/4505357433352176',
+      options: {
+        init: {
+          debug: true,
+          environment: 'development',
+          tracesSampleRate: 1.0,
+        },
+        requestHandler: {
+          serverName: false,
+          user: ['email'],
+        },
+        captureErrors: [400, 403, 404],
+      },
+    }),
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+## TypeScript
+
+All types can be directly imported:
+
+```ts
+import { PluginOptions } from '@payloadcms/plugin-sentry/types'
+```

docs/plugins/seo.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
+---
+title: SEO Plugin
+label: SEO
+order: 20
+desc: Manage SEO metadata from your Payload admin
+keywords: plugins, seo, meta, search, engine, ranking, google
+---
+
+[![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-seo)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-seo)
+
+This plugin allows you to easily manage SEO metadata for your application from within your admin panel. When enabled on your collections and globals, it adds a new `meta` field group containing `title`, `description`, and `image` by default. Your front-end application can then use this data to render meta tags however your application requires. For example, you would inject a `title` tag into the `<head>` of your page using `meta.title` as its content.
+
+As users are editing documents within the admin panel, they have the option to "auto-generate" these fields. When clicked, this plugin will execute your own custom functions that re-generate the title, description, and image. This way you can build your own SEO writing assistance directly into your application. For example, you could append your site name onto the page title, or use the document's excerpt field as the description, or even integrate with some third-party API to generate the image using AI.
+
+To help you visualize what your page might look like in a search engine, a preview is rendered on page just beneath the meta fields. This preview is updated in real-time as you edit your metadata. There are also visual indicators to help you write effective meta, such as a character counter for the title and description fields. You can even inject your own custom fields into the `meta` field group as your application requires, like `og:title` or `json-ld`. If you've ever used something like Yoast SEO, this plugin might feel very familiar.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  This plugin is completely open-source and the [source code can be found here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/plugin-seo). If you need help, check out our [Community Help](https://payloadcms.com/community-help). If you think you've found a bug, please [open a new issue](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=&labels=plugin%3A%20seo&template=bug_report.md&title=plugin-seo%3A) with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
+
+##### Core features
+
+- Adds a `meta` field group to every SEO-enabled collection or global
+- Allows you to define custom functions to auto-generate metadata
+- Displays hints and indicators to help content editor write effective meta
+- Renders a snippet of what a search engine might display
+- Extendable so you can define custom fields like `og:title` or `json-ld`
+- Soon will support dynamic variable injection
+
+## Installation
+
+Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
+
+```bash
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-seo
+```
+
+## Basic Usage
+
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config';
+import seoPlugin from '@payloadcms/plugin-seo';
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    {
+      slug: 'pages',
+      fields: []
+    },
+    {
+      slug: 'media',
+      upload: {
+        staticDir: // path to your static directory,
+      },
+      fields: []
+    }
+  ],
+  plugins: [
+    seoPlugin({
+      collections: [
+        'pages',
+      ],
+      uploadsCollection: 'media',
+      generateTitle: ({ doc }) => `Website.com — ${doc.title.value}`,
+      generateDescription: ({ doc }) => doc.excerpt
+    })
+  ]
+});
+
+export default config;
+```
+
+### Options
+
+##### `collections`
+
+An array of collections slugs to enable SEO. Enabled collections receive a `meta` field which is an object of title, description, and image subfields.
+
+##### `globals`
+
+An array of global slugs to enable SEO. Enabled globals receive a `meta` field which is an object of title, description, and image subfields.
+
+##### `fields`
+
+An array of fields that allows you to inject your own custom fields onto the `meta` field group. The following fields are provided by default:
+
+  - `title`: text
+  - `description`: textarea
+  - `image`: upload (if an `uploadsCollection` is provided)
+  - `preview`: ui
+
+##### `uploadsCollection`
+
+Set the `uploadsCollection` to your application's upload-enabled collection slug. This is used to provide an `image` field on the `meta` field group.
+
+##### `tabbedUI`
+
+When the `tabbedUI` property is `true`, it appends an `SEO` tab onto your config using Payload's [Tabs Field](https://payloadcms.com/docs/fields/tabs). If your collection is not already tab-enabled, meaning the first field in your config is not of type `tabs`, then one will be created for you called `Content`. Defaults to `false`.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  If you wish to continue to use top-level or sidebar fields with `tabbedUI`, you must not let the default `Content` tab get created for you (see the note above). Instead, you must define the first field of your config with type `tabs` and place all other fields adjacent to this one.
+</Banner>
+
+##### `generateTitle`
+
+A function that allows you to return any meta title, including from document's content.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  seoPlugin({
+    generateTitle: ({ ...docInfo, doc, locale }) => `Website.com — ${doc?.title?.value}`,
+  })
+}
+```
+
+##### `generateDescription`
+
+A function that allows you to return any meta description, including from document's content.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  seoPlugin({
+    generateDescription: ({ ...docInfo, doc, locale }) => doc?.excerpt?.value
+  })
+}
+```
+
+##### `generateImage`
+
+A function that allows you to return any meta image, including from document's content.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  seoPlugin({
+    generateImage: ({ ...docInfo, doc, locale }) => doc?.featuredImage?.value
+  })
+}
+```
+
+##### `generateURL`
+
+A function called by the search preview component to display the actual URL of your page.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  seoPlugin({
+    generateURL: ({ ...docInfo, doc, locale }) => `https://yoursite.com/${collection?.slug}/${doc?.slug?.value}`
+  })
+}
+```
+
+#### `interfaceName`
+
+Rename the meta group interface name that is generated for TypeScript and GraphQL.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  seoPlugin({
+    interfaceName: 'customInterfaceNameSEO'
+  })
+}
+```
+
+#### `fieldOverrides`
+
+Pass any valid field props to the base fields: Title, Description or Image.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+seoPlugin({
+  // ...
+  fieldOverrides: {
+    title: {
+      required: true,
+    },
+    description: {
+      localized: true,
+    },
+  },
+})
+```
+
+## TypeScript
+
+All types can be directly imported:
+
+```ts
+import {
+  PluginConfig,
+  GenerateTitle,
+  GenerateDescription
+  GenerateURL
+} from '@payloadcms/plugin-seo/types';
+```
+
+## Examples
+
+The [Templates Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) contains an official [Website Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/website) and [E-commerce Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/ecommerce) which demonstrates exactly how to configure this plugin in Payload and implement it on your front-end.
+
+## Screenshots
+
+![image](https://user-images.githubusercontent.com/70709113/163850633-f3da5f8e-2527-4688-bc79-17233307a883.png)

docs/plugins/stripe.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+---
+title: Stripe Plugin
+label: Stripe
+order: 20
+desc: Easily accept payments with Stripe
+keywords: plugins, stripe, payments, ecommerce
+---
+
+[![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-stripe)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-stripe)
+
+With this plugin you can easily integrate [Stripe](https://stripe.com) into Payload. Simply provide your Stripe credentials and this plugin will open up a two-way communication channel between the two platforms. This enables you to easily sync data back and forth, as well as proxy the Stripe REST API through Payload's access control. Use this plugin to completely offload billing to Stripe and retain full control over your application's data.
+
+For example, you might be building an e-commerce or SaaS application, where you have a `products` or a `plans` collection that requires either a one-time payment or a subscription. You can to tie each of these products to Stripe, then easily subscribe to billing-related events to perform your application's business logic, such as active purchases or subscription cancellations.
+
+To build a checkout flow on your front-end you can either use [Stripe Checkout](https://stripe.com/payments/checkout), or you can also build a completely custom checkout experience from scratch using [Stripe Web Elements](https://stripe.com/docs/payments/elements). Then to build fully custom, secure customer dashboards, you can leverage Payload's access control to restrict access to your Stripe resources so your users never have to leave your site to manage their accounts.
+
+The beauty of this plugin is the entirety of your application's content and business logic can be handled in Payload while Stripe handles solely the billing and payment processing. You can build a completely proprietary application that is endlessly customizable and extendable, on APIs and databases that you own. Hosted services like Shopify or BigCommerce might fracture your application's content then charge you for access.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  This plugin is completely open-source and the [source code can be found here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/plugin-stripe). If you need help, check out our [Community Help](https://payloadcms.com/community-help). If you think you've found a bug, please [open a new issue](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=&labels=plugin%3A%20stripe&template=bug_report.md&title=plugin-stripe%3A) with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
+
+##### Core features
+
+- Hides your Stripe credentials when shipping SaaS applications
+- Allows restricted keys through [Payload access control](https://payloadcms.com/docs/access-control/overview)
+- Enables a two-way communication channel between Stripe and Payload
+- Proxies the [Stripe REST API](https://stripe.com/docs/api)
+- Proxies [Stripe webhooks](https://stripe.com/docs/webhooks)
+- Automatically syncs data between the two platforms
+
+## Installation
+
+Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
+
+```bash
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-stripe
+```
+
+## Basic Usage
+
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import stripePlugin from '@payloadcms/plugin-stripe'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  plugins: [
+    stripePlugin({
+      stripeSecretKey: process.env.STRIPE_SECRET_KEY,
+    }),
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+### Options
+
+| Option | Type | Default | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- | --- |
+| `stripeSecretKey` \* | string | `undefined` | Your Stripe secret key |
+| `stripeWebhooksEndpointSecret` | string | `undefined` | Your Stripe webhook endpoint secret |
+| `rest` | boolean | `false` | When `true`, opens the `/api/stripe/rest` endpoint |
+| `webhooks` | object \| function | `undefined` | Either a function to handle all webhooks events, or an object of Stripe webhook handlers, keyed to the name of the event |
+| `sync` | array | `undefined` | An array of sync configs |
+| `logs` | boolean | `false` | When `true`, logs sync events to the console as they happen |
+
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+
+## Endpoints
+
+The following custom endpoints are automatically opened for you:
+
+| Endpoint | Method | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| `/api/stripe/rest` | `POST` | Proxies the [Stripe REST API](https://stripe.com/docs/api) behind [Payload access control](https://payloadcms.com/docs/access-control/overview) and returns the result. See the [REST Proxy](#stripe-rest-proxy) section for more details. |
+| `/api/stripe/webhooks` | `POST` | Handles all Stripe webhook events |
+
+##### Stripe REST Proxy
+
+If `rest` is true, proxies the [Stripe REST API](https://stripe.com/docs/api) behind [Payload access control](https://payloadcms.com/docs/access-control/overview) and returns the result. If you need to proxy the API server-side, use the [stripeProxy](#node) function.
+
+```ts
+const res = await fetch(`/api/stripe/rest`, {
+  method: 'POST',
+  credentials: 'include',
+  headers: {
+    'Content-Type': 'application/json',
+    // Authorization: `JWT ${token}` // NOTE: do this if not in a browser (i.e. curl or Postman)
+  },
+  body: JSON.stringify({
+    stripeMethod: 'stripe.subscriptions.list',
+    stripeArgs: [
+      {
+        customer: 'abc',
+      },
+    ],
+  }),
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  The `/api` part of these routes may be different based on the settings defined in your Payload config.
+</Banner>
+
+## Webhooks
+
+[Stripe webhooks](https://stripe.com/docs/webhooks) are used to sync from Stripe to Payload. Webhooks listen for events on your Stripe account so you can trigger reactions to them. Follow the steps below to enable webhooks.
+
+Development:
+
+1. Login using Stripe cli `stripe login`
+1. Forward events to localhost `stripe listen --forward-to localhost:3000/stripe/webhooks`
+1. Paste the given secret into your `.env` file as `STRIPE_WEBHOOKS_ENDPOINT_SECRET`
+
+Production:
+
+1. Login and [create a new webhook](https://dashboard.stripe.com/test/webhooks/create) from the Stripe dashboard
+1. Paste `YOUR_DOMAIN_NAME/api/stripe/webhooks` as the "Webhook Endpoint URL"
+1. Select which events to broadcast
+1. Paste the given secret into your `.env` file as `STRIPE_WEBHOOKS_ENDPOINT_SECRET`
+1. Then, handle these events using the `webhooks` portion of this plugin's config:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import stripePlugin from '@payloadcms/plugin-stripe'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  plugins: [
+    stripePlugin({
+      stripeSecretKey: process.env.STRIPE_SECRET_KEY,
+      stripeWebhooksEndpointSecret: process.env.STRIPE_WEBHOOKS_ENDPOINT_SECRET,
+      webhooks: {
+        'customer.subscription.updated': ({ event, stripe, stripeConfig }) => {
+          // do something...
+        },
+      },
+      // NOTE: you can also catch all Stripe webhook events and handle the event types yourself
+      // webhooks: (event, stripe, stripeConfig) => {
+      //   switch (event.type): {
+      //     case 'customer.subscription.updated': {
+      //       // do something...
+      //       break;
+      //     }
+      //     default: {
+      //       break;
+      //     }
+      //   }
+      // }
+    }),
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+For a full list of available webhooks, see [here](https://stripe.com/docs/cli/trigger#trigger-event).
+
+## Node
+
+On the server you should interface with Stripe directly using the [stripe](https://www.npmjs.com/package/stripe) npm module. That might look something like this:
+
+```ts
+import Stripe from 'stripe'
+
+const stripeSecretKey = process.env.STRIPE_SECRET_KEY
+const stripe = new Stripe(stripeSecretKey, { apiVersion: '2022-08-01' })
+
+export const MyFunction = async () => {
+  try {
+    const customer = await stripe.customers.create({
+      email: data.email,
+    })
+
+    // do something...
+  } catch (error) {
+    console.error(error.message)
+  }
+}
+```
+
+Alternatively, you can interface with the Stripe using the `stripeProxy`, which is exactly what the `/api/stripe/rest` endpoint does behind-the-scenes. Here's the same example as above, but piped through the proxy:
+
+```ts
+import { stripeProxy } from '@payloadcms/plugin-stripe'
+
+export const MyFunction = async () => {
+  try {
+    const customer = await stripeProxy({
+      stripeSecretKey: process.env.STRIPE_SECRET_KEY,
+      stripeMethod: 'customers.create',
+      stripeArgs: [
+        {
+          email: data.email,
+        },
+      ],
+    })
+
+    if (customer.status === 200) {
+      // do something...
+    }
+
+    if (customer.status >= 400) {
+      throw new Error(customer.message)
+    }
+  } catch (error) {
+    console.error(error.message)
+  }
+}
+```
+
+## Sync
+
+This option will setup a basic sync between Payload collections and Stripe resources for you automatically. It will create all the necessary hooks and webhooks handlers, so the only thing you have to do is map your Payload fields to their corresponding Stripe properties. As documents are created, updated, and deleted from either Stripe or Payload, the changes are reflected on either side.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  If you wish to enable a _two-way_ sync, be sure to setup [`webhooks`](#webhooks) and pass the `stripeWebhooksEndpointSecret` through your config.
+</Banner>
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import stripePlugin from '@payloadcms/plugin-stripe'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  plugins: [
+    stripePlugin({
+      stripeSecretKey: process.env.STRIPE_SECRET_KEY,
+      stripeWebhooksEndpointSecret: process.env.STRIPE_WEBHOOKS_ENDPOINT_SECRET,
+      sync: [
+        {
+          collection: 'customers',
+          stripeResourceType: 'customers',
+          stripeResourceTypeSingular: 'customer',
+          fields: [
+            {
+              fieldPath: 'name', // this is a field on your own Payload config
+              stripeProperty: 'name', // use dot notation, if applicable
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+    }),
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  Due to limitations in the Stripe API, this currently only works with top-level fields. This is because every Stripe object is a separate entity, making it difficult to abstract into a simple reusable library. In the future, we may find a pattern around this. But for now, cases like that will need to be hard-coded.
+</Banner>
+
+Using `sync` will do the following:
+
+- Adds and maintains a `stripeID` read-only field on each collection, this is a field generated _by Stripe_ and used as a cross-reference
+- Adds a direct link to the resource on Stripe.com
+- Adds and maintains an `skipSync` read-only flag on each collection to prevent infinite syncs when hooks trigger webhooks
+- Adds the following hooks to each collection:
+  - `beforeValidate`: `createNewInStripe`
+  - `beforeChange`: `syncExistingWithStripe`
+  - `afterDelete`: `deleteFromStripe`
+- Handles the following Stripe webhooks
+  - `STRIPE_TYPE.created`: `handleCreatedOrUpdated`
+  - `STRIPE_TYPE.updated`: `handleCreatedOrUpdated`
+  - `STRIPE_TYPE.deleted`: `handleDeleted`
+
+## TypeScript
+
+All types can be directly imported:
+
+```ts
+import {
+  StripeConfig,
+  StripeWebhookHandler,
+  StripeProxy,
+  ...
+} from '@payloadcms/plugin-stripe/types';
+```
+
+## Examples
+
+The [Templates Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) contains an official [E-commerce Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates/ecommerce) which demonstrates exactly how to configure this plugin in Payload and implement it on your front-end. You can also check out [How to Build An E-Commerce Site With Next.js](https://payloadcms.com/blog/how-to-build-an-e-commerce-site-with-nextjs) post for a bit more context around this template.
+

docs/production/deployment.mdx

@@ -11,7 +11,8 @@ keywords: deployment, production, config, configuration, documentation, Content
   launch. <strong>Awesome! Great work!</strong> Now, what's next?
 </Banner>
 
-There are many ways to deploy Payload to a production environment. When evaluating how you will deploy Payload, you need to consider these main aspects:
+There are many ways to deploy Payload to a production environment. When evaluating how you will deploy Payload, you need
+to consider these main aspects:
 
 1. [Basics](#basics)
 1. [Security](#security)
@@ -21,19 +22,26 @@ There are many ways to deploy Payload to a production environment. When evaluati
 
 ## Basics
 
-In order for Payload to run, it requires both the server code and the built admin panel. These will be the `dist` and `build` directories by default. If you've used `create-payload-app` to create your project, executing the `build` npm script will build both and output these directories.
+In order for Payload to run, it requires both the server code and the built admin panel. These will be the `dist`
+and `build` directories by default. If you've used `create-payload-app` to create your project, executing the `build`
+npm script will build both and output these directories.
 
 ## Security
 
-Payload features a suite of security features that you can rely on to strengthen your application's security. When deploying to Production, it's a good idea to double-check that you are making proper use of each of them.
+Payload features a suite of security features that you can rely on to strengthen your application's security. When
+deploying to Production, it's a good idea to double-check that you are making proper use of each of them.
 
 ##### The Secret Key
 
-When you initialize Payload, you provide it with a `secret` property. This property should be impossible to guess and extremely difficult for brute-force attacks to crack. Make sure your Production `secret` is a long, complex string. It's often best practice to store it in an `env` file which is not checked into your Git repository, using `dotenv` to supply it to your `payload.init` call.
+When you initialize Payload, you provide it with a `secret` property. This property should be impossible to guess and
+extremely difficult for brute-force attacks to crack. Make sure your Production `secret` is a long, complex string. It's
+often best practice to store it in an `env` file which is not checked into your Git repository, using `dotenv` to supply
+it to your `payload.init` call.
 
 ##### Double-check and thoroughly test all Access Control
 
-Because _**you**_ are in complete control of who can do what with your data, you should double and triple-check that you wield that power responsibly before deploying to Production.
+Because _**you**_ are in complete control of who can do what with your data, you should double and triple-check that you
+wield that power responsibly before deploying to Production.
 
 <Banner type="error">
   <strong>By default, all Access Control functions require that a user is successfully logged in to Payload to create, read, update, or delete data.</strong>{' '}
@@ -44,7 +52,8 @@ Because _**you**_ are in complete control of who can do what with your data, you
 
 ##### Building the Admin panel
 
-Before running in Production, you need to have built a production-ready copy of the Payload Admin panel. To do this, Payload provides the `build` NPM script. You can use it by adding a `script` to your `package.json` file like this:
+Before running in Production, you need to have built a production-ready copy of the Payload Admin panel. To do this,
+Payload provides the `build` NPM script. You can use it by adding a `script` to your `package.json` file like this:
 
 `package.json`:
 
@@ -60,19 +69,26 @@ Before running in Production, you need to have built a production-ready copy of
 }
 ```
 
-Then, to build Payload, you would run `npm run build` in your project folder. A production-ready Admin bundle will be created in the `build` directory.
+Then, to build Payload, you would run `npm run build` in your project folder. A production-ready Admin bundle will be
+created in the `build` directory.
 
 ##### Setting Node to Production
 
-Make sure you set the environment variable `NODE_ENV` to `production`. Based on this variable, many Node packages automatically optimize themselves. In production, Payload automatically disables the [GraphQL Playground](/docs/graphql/overview#graphql-playground), serves a production-ready version of the Admin panel, and other changes.
+Make sure you set the environment variable `NODE_ENV` to `production`. Based on this variable, many Node packages
+automatically optimize themselves. In production, Payload automatically disables
+the [GraphQL Playground](/docs/graphql/overview#graphql-playground), serves a production-ready version of the Admin
+panel, and other changes.
 
 ##### Secure Cookie Settings
 
-You should be using an SSL certificate for production Payload instances, which means you can [enable secure cookies](/docs/authentication/config) in your Authentication-enabled Collection configs.
+You should be using an SSL certificate for production Payload instances, which means you
+can [enable secure cookies](/docs/authentication/config) in your Authentication-enabled Collection configs.
 
 ##### Preventing API Abuse
 
-Payload comes with a robust set of built-in anti-abuse measures, such as locking out users after X amount of failed login attempts, request rate limiting, GraphQL query complexity limits, max `depth` settings, and more. [Click here to learn more](/docs/production/preventing-abuse).
+Payload comes with a robust set of built-in anti-abuse measures, such as locking out users after X amount of failed
+login attempts, request rate limiting, GraphQL query complexity limits, max `depth` settings, and
+more. [Click here to learn more](/docs/production/preventing-abuse).
 
 ## MongoDB
 
@@ -80,11 +96,18 @@ Payload can be used with any MongoDB compatible database including AWS DocumentD
 
 ##### Managing MongoDB yourself
 
-If you are using a [persistent filesystem-based cloud host](#persistent-vs-ephemeral-filesystems) such as a [DigitalOcean Droplet](https://www.digitalocean.com/products/droplets/) or an [Amazon EC2](https://aws.amazon.com/ec2/?ec2-whats-new.sort-by=item.additionalFields.postDateTime&ec2-whats-new.sort-order=desc) server, you might opt to install MongoDB directly on that server itself so that Node can communicate with it locally. With this approach, you can benefit from faster response times, but scaling can become more involved as your app's user base grows.
+If you are using a [persistent filesystem-based cloud host](#persistent-vs-ephemeral-filesystems) such as
+a [DigitalOcean Droplet](https://www.digitalocean.com/products/droplets/) or
+an [Amazon EC2](https://aws.amazon.com/ec2/?ec2-whats-new.sort-by=item.additionalFields.postDateTime&ec2-whats-new.sort-order=desc)
+server, you might opt to install MongoDB directly on that server itself so that Node can communicate with it locally.
+With this approach, you can benefit from faster response times, but scaling can become more involved as your app's user
+base grows.
 
 ##### Letting someone else do it
 
-Alternatively, you can rely on a third-party MongoDB host such as [MongoDB Atlas](https://www.mongodb.com/). With Atlas or a similar cloud provider, you can trust them to take care of your database's availability, security, redundancy, and backups.
+Alternatively, you can rely on a third-party MongoDB host such as [MongoDB Atlas](https://www.mongodb.com/). With Atlas
+or a similar cloud provider, you can trust them to take care of your database's availability, security, redundancy, and
+backups.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
@@ -98,21 +121,31 @@ Alternatively, you can rely on a third-party MongoDB host such as [MongoDB Atlas
 
 ##### DocumentDB
 
-When using AWS DocumentDB, you will need to configure connection options for authentication in the `mongoOptions` passed to `payload.init`. You also need to set `mongoOptions.useFacet` to `false` to disable use of the unsupported `$facet` aggregation.
+When using AWS DocumentDB, you will need to configure connection options for authentication in the `connectOptions`
+passed to the `mongooseAdapter` . You also need to set `connectOptions.useFacet` to `false` to disable use of the
+unsupported `$facet` aggregation.
 
 ##### CosmosDB
 
-When using Azure Cosmos DB, an index is needed for any field you may want to sort on. To add the sort index for all fields that may be sorted in the admin UI use the <a href="/docs/configuration/overview">indexSortableFields</a> configuration option.
+When using Azure Cosmos DB, an index is needed for any field you may want to sort on. To add the sort index for all
+fields that may be sorted in the admin UI use the <a href="/docs/configuration/overview">indexSortableFields</a>
+configuration option.
 
 ## File storage
 
-If you are using Payload to [manage file uploads](/docs/upload/overview), you need to consider where your uploaded files will be permanently stored. If you do not use Payload for file uploads, then this section does not impact your app whatsoever.
+If you are using Payload to [manage file uploads](/docs/upload/overview), you need to consider where your uploaded files
+will be permanently stored. If you do not use Payload for file uploads, then this section does not impact your app
+whatsoever.
 
 #### Persistent vs Ephemeral Filesystems
 
-Some cloud app hosts such as [Heroku](https://heroku.com) use `ephemeral` file systems, which means that any files uploaded to your server only last until the server restarts or shuts down. Heroku and similar providers schedule restarts and shutdowns without your control, meaning your uploads will accidentally disappear without any way to get them back.
+Some cloud app hosts such as [Heroku](https://heroku.com) use `ephemeral` file systems, which means that any files
+uploaded to your server only last until the server restarts or shuts down. Heroku and similar providers schedule
+restarts and shutdowns without your control, meaning your uploads will accidentally disappear without any way to get
+them back.
 
-Alternatively, persistent filesystems will never delete your files and can be trusted to reliably host uploads perpetually.
+Alternatively, persistent filesystems will never delete your files and can be trusted to reliably host uploads
+perpetually.
 
 **Popular cloud providers with ephemeral filesystems:**
 
@@ -135,21 +168,26 @@ Alternatively, persistent filesystems will never delete your files and can be tr
 
 ##### Using ephemeral filesystem providers like Heroku
 
-If you don't use Payload's `upload` functionality, you can go ahead and use Heroku or similar platform easily. Everything will work exactly as you want it to.
+If you don't use Payload's `upload` functionality, you can go ahead and use Heroku or similar platform easily.
+Everything will work exactly as you want it to.
 
-But, if you do, and you still want to use an ephemeral filesystem provider, you can write a hook-based solution to _copy_ the files your users upload to a more permanent storage solution like Amazon S3 or DigitalOcean Spaces.
+But, if you do, and you still want to use an ephemeral filesystem provider, you can write a hook-based solution to
+_copy_ the files your users upload to a more permanent storage solution like Amazon S3 or DigitalOcean Spaces.
 
 **To automatically send uploaded files to S3 or similar, you could:**
 
-- Write an asynchronous `beforeChange` hook for all Collections that support Uploads, which takes any uploaded `file` from the Express `req` and sends it to an S3 bucket
-- Write an `afterRead` hook to save a `s3URL` field that automatically takes the `filename` stored and formats a full S3 URL
+- Write an asynchronous `beforeChange` hook for all Collections that support Uploads, which takes any uploaded `file`
+  from the Express `req` and sends it to an S3 bucket
+- Write an `afterRead` hook to save a `s3URL` field that automatically takes the `filename` stored and formats a full S3
+  URL
 - Write an `afterDelete` hook that automatically deletes files from the S3 bucket
 
 With the above configuration, deploying to Heroku or similar becomes no problem.
 
 ## DigitalOcean Tutorials
 
-DigitalOcean provides extremely helpful documentation that can walk you through the entire process of creating a production-ready Droplet to host your Payload app:
+DigitalOcean provides extremely helpful documentation that can walk you through the entire process of creating a
+production-ready Droplet to host your Payload app:
 
 1. Create a new Ubuntu 20.04 droplet on [DigitalOcean](https://digitalocean.com)
 1. [Initial server setup](https://www.digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/initial-server-setup-with-ubuntu-20-04)
@@ -158,9 +196,27 @@ DigitalOcean provides extremely helpful documentation that can walk you through
 1. [Create a new MongoDB and user](https://medium.com/@mhagemann/how-to-add-a-new-user-to-a-mongodb-database-d896776b5362)
 1. [Set up Node for production](https://www.digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/how-to-set-up-a-node-js-application-for-production-on-ubuntu-20-04)
 
+### Swap Space
+
+Swap refers to a section of storage on the hard drive that is reserved to temporarily store data that can no longer fit
+within RAM. This allows for the expansion of your server's working memory, with some limitations. Swap space comes into
+play when available RAM can no longer accommodate actively used application data, enabling the system to continue
+functioning.
+
+Insufficient space can lead to deployment errors and memory-related issues, resulting in application crashes, sluggish
+performance, or an unresponsive server.
+
+Common deployment error due to **space limitations** (as reported by users):
+
+- `Error: Command failed with exit code 1`
+
+To configure swap, we recommend following this tutorial
+on [How To Add Swap Space](https://www.digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/how-to-add-swap-space-on-ubuntu-22-04).
+
 ## Docker
 
-This is an example of a multi-stage docker build of Payload for production. Ensure you are setting your environment variables on deployment, like `PAYLOAD_SECRET`, `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH`, and `DATABASE_URI` if needed.
+This is an example of a multi-stage docker build of Payload for production. Ensure you are setting your environment
+variables on deployment, like `PAYLOAD_SECRET`, `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH`, and `DATABASE_URI` if needed.
 
 ```dockerfile
 FROM node:18-alpine as base

docs/production/preventing-abuse.mdx

@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ To prevent DDoS, brute-force, and similar attacks, you can set IP-based rate lim
 
 | Option           | Description                                                                                                             |
 | ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`window`**     | Time in milliseconds to track requests per IP. Defaults to `90000` (15 minutes).                                        |
+| **`window`**     | Time in milliseconds to track requests per IP. Defaults to `900000` (15 minutes).                                        |
 | **`max`**        | Number of requests served from a single IP before limiting. Defaults to `500`.                                          |
 | **`skip`**       | Express middleware function that can return true (or promise resulting in true) that will bypass limit.                 |
 | **`trustProxy`** | True or false, to enable to allow requests to pass through a proxy such as a load balancer or an `nginx` reverse proxy. |

docs/queries/pagination.mdx

@@ -62,4 +62,4 @@ All Payload APIs support the pagination controls below. With them, you can creat
 
 ### Disabling pagination within Local API
 
-For `find` operations within the Local API, you can disable pagination to retrieve all documents from a collection by passing `pagination: false` to the `find` local operation. This is not supported in REST or GraphQL, however, because it could potentially lead to malicious activity.
+For `find` operations within the Local API, you can disable pagination to retrieve all documents from a collection by passing `pagination: false` to the `find` local operation.

docs/rest-api/overview.mdx

@@ -90,6 +90,19 @@ Note: Collection slugs must be formatted in kebab-case
         },
       },
     },
+    {
+      operation: "Count",
+      method: "GET",
+      path: "/api/{collection-slug}/count",
+      description: "Count the documents",
+      example: {
+        slug: "count",
+        req: true,
+        res: {
+         totalDocs: 10
+        },
+      },
+    },
     {
       operation: "Create",
       method: "POST",

docs/rich-text/lexical.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: Lexical Rich Text
 label: Lexical
 order: 30
-desc: Built by Meta, Lexical is an incredibly powerful rich text editor and it works beautifully within Payload.
+desc: Built by Meta, Lexical is an incredibly powerful rich text editor, and it works beautifully within Payload.
 keywords: lexical, rich text, editor, headless cms
 ---
 
@@ -45,7 +45,39 @@ export default buildConfig({
 You can also override Lexical settings on a field-by-field basis as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import {
+  lexicalEditor
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+export const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'pages',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'content',
+      type: 'richText',
+      // Pass the Lexical editor here and override base settings as necessary
+      editor: lexicalEditor({})
+    }
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+## Extending the lexical editor with Features
+
+Lexical has been designed with extensibility in mind. Whether you're aiming to introduce new functionalities or tweak the existing ones, Lexical makes it seamless for you to bring those changes to life.
+
+### Features: The Building Blocks
+
+At the heart of Lexical's customization potential are "features". While Lexical ships with a set of default features we believe are essential for most use cases, the true power lies in your ability to redefine, expand, or prune these as needed.
+
+If you remove all the default features, you're left with a blank editor. You can then add in only the features you need, or you can build your own custom features from scratch.
+
+### Integrating New Features
+
+To weave in your custom features, utilize the `features` prop when initializing the Lexical Editor. Here's a basic example of how this is done:
+
+```ts
 import {
   BlocksFeature,
   LinkFeature,
@@ -55,62 +87,559 @@ import {
 import { Banner } from '../blocks/Banner'
 import { CallToAction } from '../blocks/CallToAction'
 
-export const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
+{
+  editor: lexicalEditor({
+    features: ({ defaultFeatures }) => [
+      ...defaultFeatures,
+      LinkFeature({
+        // Example showing how to customize the built-in fields
+        // of the Link feature
+        fields: [
+          {
+            name: 'rel',
+            label: 'Rel Attribute',
+            type: 'select',
+            hasMany: true,
+            options: ['noopener', 'noreferrer', 'nofollow'],
+            admin: {
+              description:
+                'The rel attribute defines the relationship between a linked resource and the current document. This is a custom link field.',
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+      }),
+      UploadFeature({
+        collections: {
+          uploads: {
+            // Example showing how to customize the built-in fields
+            // of the Upload feature
+            fields: [
+              {
+                name: 'caption',
+                type: 'richText',
+                editor: lexicalEditor(),
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        },
+      }),
+      // This is incredibly powerful. You can re-use your Payload blocks
+      // directly in the Lexical editor as follows:
+      BlocksFeature({
+        blocks: [
+          Banner,
+          CallToAction,
+        ],
+      }),
+    ]
+  })
+}
+```
+
+## Features overview
+
+Here's an overview of all the included features:
+
+| Feature Name                   | Included by default | Description                                                                                                                                                                            |
+|--------------------------------|---------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`BoldTextFeature`**          | Yes                 | Handles the bold text format                                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`ItalicTextFeature`**        | Yes                 | Handles the italic text format                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`UnderlineTextFeature`**     | Yes                 | Handles the underline text format                                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`StrikethroughTextFeature`** | Yes                 | Handles the strikethrough text format                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`SubscriptTextFeature`**     | Yes                 | Handles the subscript text format                                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`SuperscriptTextFeature`**   | Yes                 | Handles the superscript text format                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`InlineCodeTextFeature`**    | Yes                 | Handles the inline-code text format                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`ParagraphFeature`**         | Yes                 | Handles paragraphs. Since they are already a key feature of lexical itself, this Feature mainly handles the Slash and Add-Block menu entries for paragraphs                            |
+| **`HeadingFeature`**           | Yes                 | Adds Heading Nodes (by default, H1 - H6, but that can be customized)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`AlignFeature`**             | Yes                 | Allows you to align text left, centered and right                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`IndentFeature`**            | Yes                 | Allows you to indent text with the tab key                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`UnorderedListFeature`**     | Yes                 | Adds unordered lists (ul)                                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`OrderedListFeature`**       | Yes                 | Adds ordered lists (ol)                                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`CheckListFeature`**         | Yes                 | Adds checklists                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`LinkFeature`**              | Yes                 | Allows you to create internal and external links                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`RelationshipFeature`**      | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level (not inline) relationships to other documents                                                                                                         |
+| **`BlockQuoteFeature`**        | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level quotes                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`UploadFeature`**            | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level upload nodes - this supports all kinds of uploads, not just images                                                                                    |
+| **`HorizontalRuleFeature`**    | Yes                 | Horizontal rules / separators. Basically displays an `<hr>` element                                                                                                                      |
+| **`BlocksFeature`**            | No                  | Allows you to use Payload's [Blocks Field](/docs/fields/blocks) directly inside your editor. In the feature props, you can specify the allowed blocks - just like in the Blocks field. |
+| **`TreeViewFeature`**          | No                  | Adds a debug box under the editor, which allows you to see the current editor state live, the dom, as well as time travel. Very useful for debugging                                   |
+
+## Creating your own, custom Feature
+
+Creating your own custom feature requires deep knowledge of the Lexical editor. We recommend you take a look at the [Lexical documentation](https://lexical.dev/docs/intro) first - especially the "concepts" section.
+
+Next, take a look at the [features we've already built](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/richtext-lexical/src/field/features) - understanding how they work will help you understand how to create your own. There is no difference between the features included by default and the ones you create yourself - since those features are all isolated from the "core", you have access to the same APIs, whether the feature is part of payload or not!
+
+## Converters
+
+### Lexical => HTML
+
+Lexical saves data in JSON, but can also generate its HTML representation via two main methods:
+
+1. **Outputting HTML from the Collection:** Create a new field in your collection to convert saved JSON content to HTML. Payload generates and outputs the HTML for use in your frontend.
+2. **Generating HTML on any server** Convert JSON to HTML on-demand on the server.
+
+The editor comes with built-in HTML serializers, simplifying the process of converting JSON to HTML.
+
+#### Outputting HTML from the Collection
+
+To add HTML generation directly within the collection, follow the example below:
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+
+import {
+  HTMLConverterFeature,
+  lexicalEditor,
+  lexicalHTML
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'pages',
   fields: [
     {
-      name: 'content',
+      name: 'nameOfYourRichTextField',
       type: 'richText',
-      // Pass the Lexical editor here and override base settings as necessary
       editor: lexicalEditor({
         features: ({ defaultFeatures }) => [
           ...defaultFeatures,
-          LinkFeature({
-            // Example showing how to customize the built-in fields
-            // of the Link feature
-            fields: [
-              {
-                name: 'rel',
-                label: 'Rel Attribute',
-                type: 'select',
-                hasMany: true,
-                options: ['noopener', 'noreferrer', 'nofollow'],
-                admin: {
-                  description:
-                    'The rel attribute defines the relationship between a linked resource and the current document. This is a custom link field.',
-                },
-              },
-            ],
-          }),
-          UploadFeature({
-            collections: {
-              uploads: {
-                // Example showing how to customize the built-in fields
-                // of the Upload feature
-                fields: [
-                  {
-                    name: 'caption',
-                    type: 'richText',
-                    editor: lexicalEditor(),
-                  },
-                ],
-              },
-            },
-          }),
-          // This is incredibly powerful. You can re-use your Payload blocks
-          // directly in the Lexical editor as follows:
-          BlocksFeature({
-            blocks: [
-              Banner,
-              CallToAction,
-            ],
-          }),
-        ]
-      })
-    }
-  ]
+          // The HTMLConverter Feature is the feature which manages the HTML serializers.
+          // If you do not pass any arguments to it, it will use the default serializers.
+          HTMLConverterFeature({}),
+        ],
+      }),
+    },
+    lexicalHTML('nameOfYourRichTextField', { name: 'nameOfYourRichTextField_html' }),
+  ],
 }
 ```
+The `lexicalHTML()` function creates a new field that automatically converts the referenced lexical richText field into HTML through an afterRead hook.
+
+#### Generating HTML anywhere on the server:
+
+If you wish to convert JSON to HTML ad-hoc, use this code snippet:
+
+```ts
+import type { SerializedEditorState } from 'lexical'
+import {
+  type SanitizedEditorConfig,
+  convertLexicalToHTML,
+  consolidateHTMLConverters,
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+async function lexicalToHTML(editorData: SerializedEditorState, editorConfig: SanitizedEditorConfig) {
+  return await convertLexicalToHTML({
+    converters: consolidateHTMLConverters({ editorConfig }),
+    data: editorData,
+  })
+}
+```
+This method employs `convertLexicalToHTML` from `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical`, which converts the serialized editor state into HTML.
+
+Because every `Feature` is able to provide html converters, and because the `htmlFeature` can modify those or provide their own, we need to consolidate them with the default html Converters using the `consolidateHTMLConverters` function.
+
+#### Creating your own HTML Converter
+
+HTML Converters are typed as `HTMLConverter`, which contains the node type it should handle, and a function that accepts the serialized node from the lexical editor, and outputs the HTML string. Here's the HTML Converter of the Upload node as an example:
+
+```ts
+import type { HTMLConverter } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+import payload from 'payload'
+
+const UploadHTMLConverter: HTMLConverter<SerializedUploadNode> = {
+  converter: async ({ node }) => {
+    const uploadDocument = await payload.findByID({
+      id: node.value.id,
+      collection: node.relationTo,
+    })
+    const url = (payload?.config?.serverURL || '') + uploadDocument?.url
+
+    if (!(uploadDocument?.mimeType as string)?.startsWith('image')) {
+      // Only images can be serialized as HTML
+      return ``
+    }
+
+    return `<img src="${url}" alt="${uploadDocument?.filename}" width="${uploadDocument?.width}"  height="${uploadDocument?.height}"/>`
+  },
+  nodeTypes: [UploadNode.getType()], // This is the type of the lexical node that this converter can handle. Instead of hardcoding 'upload' we can get the node type directly from the UploadNode, since it's static.
+}
+```
+
+As you can see, we have access to all the information saved in the node (for the Upload node, this is `value`and `relationTo`) and we can use that to generate the HTML.
+
+The `convertLexicalToHTML` is part of `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical` automatically handles traversing the editor state and calling the correct converter for each node.
+
+#### Embedding the HTML Converter in your Feature
+
+You can embed your HTML Converter directly within your custom `Feature`, allowing it to be handled automatically by the `consolidateHTMLConverters` function. Here is an example:
+
+```ts
+export const UploadFeature = (props?: UploadFeatureProps): FeatureProvider => {
+  return {
+    feature: () => {
+      return {
+        nodes: [
+          {
+            converters: {
+              html: yourHTMLConverter, // <= This is where you define your HTML Converter
+            },
+            node: UploadNode,
+            type: UploadNode.getType(),
+            //...
+          },
+        ],
+        plugins: [/*...*/],
+        props: props,
+        slashMenu: {/*...*/},
+      }
+    },
+    key: 'upload',
+  }
+}
+```
+
+### Headless Editor
+
+Lexical provides a seamless way to perform conversions between various other formats:
+- HTML to Lexical (or, importing HTML into the lexical editor)
+- Markdown to Lexical (or, importing Markdown into the lexical editor)
+- Lexical to Markdown
+
+A headless editor can perform such conversions outside of the main editor instance. Follow this method to initiate a headless editor:
+
+```ts
+import { createHeadlessEditor } from '@lexical/headless' // <= make sure this package is installed
+import {
+  getEnabledNodes,
+  sanitizeEditorConfig,
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+const yourEditorConfig; // <= your editor config here
+
+const headlessEditor = createHeadlessEditor({
+  nodes: getEnabledNodes({
+    editorConfig: sanitizeEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig),
+  }),
+})
+```
+
+### Getting the editor config
+
+As you can see, you need to provide an editor config in order to create a headless editor. This is because the editor config is used to determine which nodes & features are enabled, and which converters are used.
+
+To get the editor config, simply import the default editor config and adjust it - just like you did inside of the `editor: lexicalEditor({})` property:
+
+```ts
+import { defaultEditorConfig, defaultEditorFeatures } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical' // <= make sure this package is installed
+
+const yourEditorConfig = defaultEditorConfig
+
+// If you made changes to the features of the field's editor config, you should also make those changes here:
+yourEditorConfig.features = [
+  ...defaultEditorFeatures,
+  // Add your custom features here
+]
+```
+
+### HTML => Lexical
+
+Once you have your headless editor instance, you can use it to convert HTML to Lexical:
+
+```ts
+import { $generateNodesFromDOM } from '@lexical/html'
+import { $getRoot,$getSelection } from 'lexical'
+import { JSDOM } from 'jsdom';
+
+headlessEditor.update(() => {
+  // In a headless environment you can use a package such as JSDom to parse the HTML string.
+  const dom = new JSDOM(htmlString)
+
+  // Once you have the DOM instance it's easy to generate LexicalNodes.
+  const nodes = $generateNodesFromDOM(headlessEditor, dom.window.document)
+
+  // Select the root
+  $getRoot().select()
+
+  // Insert them at a selection.
+  const selection = $getSelection()
+  selection.insertNodes(nodes)
+}, { discrete: true })
+
+// Do this if you then want to get the editor JSON
+const editorJSON = headlessEditor.getEditorState().toJSON()
+```
+
+Functions prefixed with a `$` can only be run inside of an `editor.update()` or `editorState.read()` callback.
+
+This has been taken from the [lexical serialization & deserialization docs](https://lexical.dev/docs/concepts/serialization#html---lexical).
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  Using the <code>discrete: true</code> flag ensures instant updates to the editor state. If immediate reading of the updated state isn't necessary, you can omit the flag.
+</Banner>
+
+### Markdown => Lexical
+
+Convert markdown content to the Lexical editor format with the following:
+
+```ts
+import { $convertFromMarkdownString } from '@lexical/markdown'
+import { sanitizeEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig) // <= your editor config here
+const markdown = `# Hello World`
+
+headlessEditor.update(() => { $convertFromMarkdownString(markdown, yourSanitizedEditorConfig.features.markdownTransformers) }, { discrete: true })
+
+// Do this if you then want to get the editor JSON
+const editorJSON = headlessEditor.getEditorState().toJSON()
+```
+
+### Lexical => Markdown
+
+Export content from the Lexical editor into Markdown format using these steps:
+
+1. Import your current editor state into the headless editor.
+2. Convert and fetch the resulting markdown string.
+
+Here's the code for it:
+
+```ts
+import { $convertToMarkdownString } from '@lexical/markdown'
+import { sanitizeEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+import type { SerializedEditorState } from "lexical"
+
+const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig) // <= your editor config here
+const yourEditorState: SerializedEditorState // <= your current editor state here
+
+// Import editor state into your headless editor
+try {
+  headlessEditor.setEditorState(headlessEditor.parseEditorState(yourEditorState)) // This should commit the editor state immediately
+} catch (e) {
+  logger.error({ err: e }, 'ERROR parsing editor state')
+}
+
+// Export to markdown
+let markdown: string
+headlessEditor.getEditorState().read(() => {
+  markdown = $convertToMarkdownString(yourSanitizedEditorConfig?.features?.markdownTransformers)
+})
+```
+
+The `.setEditorState()` function immediately updates your editor state. Thus, there's no need for the `discrete: true` flag when reading the state afterward.
+
+
+### Lexical => Plain Text
+
+Export content from the Lexical editor into plain text using these steps:
+
+1. Import your current editor state into the headless editor.
+2. Convert and fetch the resulting plain text string.
+
+Here's the code for it:
+
+```ts
+import type { SerializedEditorState } from "lexical"
+import { $getRoot } from "lexical"
+
+const yourEditorState: SerializedEditorState // <= your current editor state here
+
+// Import editor state into your headless editor
+try {
+  headlessEditor.setEditorState(headlessEditor.parseEditorState(yourEditorState)) // This should commit the editor state immediately
+} catch (e) {
+  logger.error({ err: e }, 'ERROR parsing editor state')
+}
+
+// Export to plain text
+const plainTextContent = headlessEditor.getEditorState().read(() => {
+  return $getRoot().getTextContent()
+}) || ''
+```
+
+## Migrating from Slate
+
+While both Slate and Lexical save the editor state in JSON, the structure of the JSON is different.
+
+### Migration via SlateToLexicalFeature
+
+One way to handle this is to just give your lexical editor the ability to read the slate JSON.
+
+Simply add the `SlateToLexicalFeature` to your editor:
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+
+import {
+  SlateToLexicalFeature,
+  lexicalEditor,
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'pages',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'nameOfYourRichTextField',
+      type: 'richText',
+      editor: lexicalEditor({
+        features: ({ defaultFeatures }) => [
+          ...defaultFeatures,
+          SlateToLexicalFeature({})
+        ],
+      }),
+    },
+  ],
+}
+```
+
+and done! Now, everytime this lexical editor is initialized, it converts the slate date to lexical on-the-fly. If the data is already in lexical format, it will just pass it through.
+
+This is by far the easiest way to migrate from Slate to Lexical, although it does come with a few caveats:
+- There is a performance hit when initializing the lexical editor
+- The editor will still output the Slate data in the output JSON, as the on-the-fly converter only runs for the admin panel
+
+The easy way to solve this: Just save the document! This overrides the slate data with the lexical data, and the next time the document is loaded, the lexical data will be used. This solves both the performance and the output issue for that specific document.
+
+### Migration via migration script
+
+The method described above does not solve the issue for all documents, though. If you want to convert all your documents to lexical, you can use a migration script. Here's a simple example:
+
+```ts
+import type { Payload } from 'payload'
+import type { YourDocumentType } from 'payload/generated-types'
+
+import {
+  cloneDeep,
+  convertSlateToLexical,
+  defaultSlateConverters,
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+import { AnotherCustomConverter } from './lexicalFeatures/converters/AnotherCustomConverter'
+
+export async function convertAll(payload: Payload, collectionName: string, fieldName: string) {
+  const docs: YourDocumentType[] = await payload.db.collections[collectionName].find({}).exec() // Use MongoDB models directly to query all documents at once
+  console.log(`Found ${docs.length} ${collectionName} docs`)
+
+  const converters = cloneDeep([...defaultSlateConverters, AnotherCustomConverter])
+
+  // Split docs into batches of 20.
+  const batchSize = 20
+  const batches = []
+  for (let i = 0; i < docs.length; i += batchSize) {
+    batches.push(docs.slice(i, i + batchSize))
+  }
+
+  let processed = 0 // Number of processed docs
+
+  for (const batch of batches) {
+    // Process each batch asynchronously
+    const promises = batch.map(async (doc: YourDocumentType) => {
+      const richText = doc[fieldName]
+
+      if (richText && Array.isArray(richText) && !('root' in richText)) { // It's Slate data - skip already-converted data
+        const converted = convertSlateToLexical({
+          converters: converters,
+          slateData: richText,
+        })
+
+        await payload.update({
+          id: doc.id,
+          collection: collectionName as any,
+          data: {
+            [fieldName]: converted,
+          },
+        })
+      }
+    })
+
+    // Wait for all promises in the batch to complete. Resolving batches of 20 asynchronously is faster than waiting for each doc to update individually
+    await Promise.all(promises)
+
+    // Update the count of processed docs
+    processed += batch.length
+    console.log(`Converted ${processed} of ${docs.length}`)
+  }
+}
+```
+
+The `convertSlateToLexical` is the same method used in the `SlateToLexicalFeature` - it handles traversing the Slate JSON for you.
+
+Do note that this script might require adjustment depending on your document structure, especially if you have nested richText fields or localization enabled.
+
+### Converting custom Slate nodes
+
+If you have custom Slate nodes, create a custom converter for them. Here's the Upload converter as an example:
+
+```ts
+import type { SerializedUploadNode } from '../uploadNode.'
+import type { SlateNodeConverter } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+export const SlateUploadConverter: SlateNodeConverter = {
+  converter({ slateNode }) {
+    return {
+      fields: {
+        ...slateNode.fields,
+      },
+      format: '',
+      relationTo: slateNode.relationTo,
+      type: 'upload',
+      value: {
+        id: slateNode.value?.id || '',
+      },
+      version: 1,
+    } as const as SerializedUploadNode
+  },
+  nodeTypes: ['upload'],
+}
+```
+
+It's pretty simple: You get a Slate node as input, and you return the lexical node. The `nodeTypes` array is used to determine which Slate nodes this converter can handle.
+
+When using a migration script, you can add your custom converters to the `converters` property of the `convertSlateToLexical` props, as seen in the example above
+
+When using the `SlateToLexicalFeature`, you can add your custom converters to the `converters` property of the `SlateToLexicalFeature` props:
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+
+import {
+  SlateToLexicalFeature,
+  lexicalEditor,
+  defaultSlateConverters
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+import { YourCustomConverter } from '../converters/YourCustomConverter'
+
+const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'pages',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'nameOfYourRichTextField',
+      type: 'richText',
+      editor: lexicalEditor({
+        features: ({ defaultFeatures }) => [
+          ...defaultFeatures,
+          SlateToLexicalFeature({
+            converters: [
+              ...defaultSlateConverters,
+              YourCustomConverter
+            ]
+          }),
+        ],
+      }),
+    },
+  ],
+}
+```
+
+## Migrating from payload-plugin-lexical
+
+Migrating from [payload-plugin-lexical](https://github.com/AlessioGr/payload-plugin-lexical) works similar to migrating from Slate.
+
+Instead of a `SlateToLexicalFeature` there is a `LexicalPluginToLexicalFeature` you can use. And instead of `convertSlateToLexical` you can use `convertLexicalPluginToLexical`.
+
+## Coming Soon
 
 Lots more documentation will be coming soon, which will show in detail how to create your own custom features within Lexical.
 

docs/rich-text/slate.mdx

@@ -168,7 +168,9 @@ Specifying custom `Type`s let you extend your custom elements by adding addition
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+
+import { slateEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-slate'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -182,57 +184,59 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
         },
       ],
       required: true,
-      admin: {
-        elements: [
-          'h2',
-          'h3',
-          'h4',
-          'link',
-          'blockquote',
-          {
-            name: 'cta',
-            Button: CustomCallToActionButton,
-            Element: CustomCallToActionElement,
-            plugins: [
-              // any plugins that are required by this element go here
-            ],
-          },
-        ],
-        leaves: [
-          'bold',
-          'italic',
-          {
-            name: 'highlight',
-            Button: CustomHighlightButton,
-            Leaf: CustomHighlightLeaf,
-            plugins: [
-              // any plugins that are required by this leaf go here
-            ],
-          },
-        ],
-        link: {
-          // Inject your own fields into the Link element
-          fields: [
+      editor: slateEditor({
+        admin: {
+          elements: [
+            'h2',
+            'h3',
+            'h4',
+            'link',
+            'blockquote',
             {
-              name: 'rel',
-              label: 'Rel Attribute',
-              type: 'select',
-              hasMany: true,
-              options: ['noopener', 'noreferrer', 'nofollow'],
-            },
-          ],
-        },
-        upload: {
-          collections: {
-            media: {
-              fields: [
-                // any fields that you would like to save
-                // on an upload element in the `media` collection
+              name: 'cta',
+              Button: CustomCallToActionButton,
+              Element: CustomCallToActionElement,
+              plugins: [
+                // any plugins that are required by this element go here
               ],
             },
+          ],
+          leaves: [
+            'bold',
+            'italic',
+            {
+              name: 'highlight',
+              Button: CustomHighlightButton,
+              Leaf: CustomHighlightLeaf,
+              plugins: [
+                // any plugins that are required by this leaf go here
+              ],
+            },
+          ],
+          link: {
+            // Inject your own fields into the Link element
+            fields: [
+              {
+                name: 'rel',
+                label: 'Rel Attribute',
+                type: 'select',
+                hasMany: true,
+                options: ['noopener', 'noreferrer', 'nofollow'],
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+          upload: {
+            collections: {
+              media: {
+                fields: [
+                  // any fields that you would like to save
+                  // on an upload element in the `media` collection
+                ],
+              },
+            },
           },
         },
-      },
+      }),
     },
   ],
 }
@@ -266,6 +270,10 @@ const serialize = (children) =>
         text = <em key={i}>{text}</em>;
       }
 
+      if (node.text === '') {
+        text = <br />;
+      }
+
       // Handle other leaf types here...
 
       return <Fragment key={i}>{text}</Fragment>;

docs/typescript/generating-types.mdx

@@ -18,6 +18,32 @@ payload generate:types
 
 You can run this command whenever you need to regenerate your types, and then you can use these types in your Payload code directly.
 
+### Disable declare statement
+
+By default, `generate:types` will add a `declare` statement to your types file, which automatically enables type inference within Payload.
+
+If you are using your `payload-types.ts` file in other repos, though, it might be better to disable this `declare` statement, so that you don't get any TS errors in projects that use your Payload types, but do not have Payload installed.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  typescript: {
+    declare: false, // defaults to true if not set
+  },
+}
+```
+
+If you do disable the `declare` pattern, you'll need to manually add a `declare` statement to your code in order for Payload types to be recognized. Here's an example showing how to declare your types in your `payload.config.ts` file:
+
+```ts
+import { Config } from './payload-types'
+
+declare module 'payload' {
+  export interface GeneratedTypes extends Config {}
+}
+```
+
 ### Custom output file path
 
 You can specify where you want your types to be generated by adding a property to your Payload config:

docs/typescript/overview.mdx

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ keywords: headless cms, typescript, documentation, Content Management System, cm
 Payload supports TypeScript natively, and not only that, the entirety of the CMS is built with TypeScript. To get started developing with Payload and TypeScript, you can use one of Payload's built-in boilerplates in one line via `create-payload-app`:
 
 ```
-npx create-payload-app
+npx create-payload-app@latest
 ```
 
 Pick a TypeScript project type to get started easily.

docs/upload/overview.mdx

@@ -38,22 +38,24 @@ Every Payload Collection can opt-in to supporting Uploads by specifying the `upl
   </strong> on that collection.
 </Banner>
 
-#### Collection Upload Options
+### Collection Upload Options
 
-| Option                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                             |
-| ------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`staticURL`** \*        | The URL path to use to access your uploads. Relative path like `/media` will be served by payload. Full path like `https://example.com/media` needs to be served by another web server. |
-| **`staticDir`** \*        | The folder directory to use to store media in. Can be either an absolute path or relative to the directory that contains your config.                                                   |
-| **`adminThumbnail`**      | Set the way that the Admin panel will display thumbnails for this Collection. [More](#admin-thumbnails)                                                                                 |
-| **`crop`**                | Set to `false` to disable the cropping tool in the Admin panel. Crop is enabled by default. [More](#crop-and-focal-point-selector)                                                      |
-| **`disableLocalStorage`** | Completely disable uploading files to disk locally. [More](#disabling-local-upload-storage)                                                                                             |
-| **`focalPoint`**          | Set to `false` to disable the focal point selection tool in the Admin panel. The focal point selector is only available when `imageSizes` or `resizeOptions` are defined. [More](#crop-and-focal-point-selector)                                |
-| **`formatOptions`**       | An object with `format` and `options` that are used with the Sharp image library to format the upload file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-output#toformat)                 |
-| **`handlers`**            | Array of Express request handlers to execute before the built-in Payload static middleware executes.                                                                                    |
-| **`imageSizes`**          | If specified, image uploads will be automatically resized in accordance to these image sizes. [More](#image-sizes)                                                                      |
-| **`mimeTypes`**           | Restrict mimeTypes in the file picker. Array of valid mimetypes or mimetype wildcards [More](#mimetypes)                                                                                |
-| **`staticOptions`**       | Set options for `express.static` to use while serving your static files. [More](http://expressjs.com/en/resources/middleware/serve-static.html)  format)                                |
-| **`resizeOptions`**       | An object passed to the the Sharp image library to resize the uploaded file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-resize)                                                                                                                |
+| Option                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                             |
+| -------------------------      | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`staticURL`** \*             | The URL path to use to access your uploads. Relative path like `/media` will be served by payload. Full path like `https://example.com/media` needs to be served by another web server. |
+| **`staticDir`** \*             | The folder directory to use to store media in. Can be either an absolute path or relative to the directory that contains your config.                                                   |
+| **`adminThumbnail`**           | Set the way that the Admin panel will display thumbnails for this Collection. [More](#admin-thumbnails)                                                                                 |
+| **`crop`**                     | Set to `false` to disable the cropping tool in the Admin panel. Crop is enabled by default. [More](#crop-and-focal-point-selector)                                                      |
+| **`disableLocalStorage`**      | Completely disable uploading files to disk locally. [More](#disabling-local-upload-storage)                                                                                             |
+| **`externalFileHeaderFilter`** | Accepts existing headers and can filter/modify them.                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`focalPoint`**               | Set to `false` to disable the focal point selection tool in the Admin panel. The focal point selector is only available when `imageSizes` or `resizeOptions` are defined. [More](#crop-and-focal-point-selector) |
+| **`formatOptions`**            | An object with `format` and `options` that are used with the Sharp image library to format the upload file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-output#toformat)                 |
+| **`handlers`**                 | Array of Express request handlers to execute before the built-in Payload static middleware executes.                                                                                    |
+| **`imageSizes`**               | If specified, image uploads will be automatically resized in accordance to these image sizes. [More](#image-sizes)                                                                      |
+| **`mimeTypes`**                | Restrict mimeTypes in the file picker. Array of valid mimetypes or mimetype wildcards [More](#mimetypes)                                                                                |
+| **`staticOptions`**            | Set options for `express.static` to use while serving your static files. [More](http://expressjs.com/en/resources/middleware/serve-static.html)                                         |
+| **`resizeOptions`**            | An object passed to the the Sharp image library to resize the uploaded file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-resize)                                                         |
+| **`filesRequiredOnCreate`**    | Mandate file data on creation, default is true.                                                                                                                                         |
 
 _An asterisk denotes that a property above is required._
 
@@ -147,6 +149,23 @@ All auto-resized images are exposed to be re-used in hooks and similar via an ob
 
 The object will have keys for each size generated, and each key will be set equal to a buffer containing the file data.
 
+##### Handling Image Enlargement
+
+When an uploaded image is smaller than the defined image size, we have 3 options:
+
+`withoutEnlargement: undefined | false | true`
+
+1.`undefined` [default]: uploading images with smaller width AND height than the image size will return null
+2. `false`: always enlarge images to the image size
+3. `true`: if the image is smaller than the image size, return the original image
+
+<Banner type="error">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  By default, the image size will return NULL when the uploaded image is smaller than the defined image size.
+  Use the `withoutEnlargement` prop to change this.
+</Banner>
+
 ### Crop and Focal Point Selector
 
 This feature is only available for image file types.

docs/versions/autosave.mdx

@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Collections and Globals both support the same options for configuring autosave.
 
 | Drafts Autosave Options | Description                                                                                                                                                            |
 | ----------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `interval`              | Define an `interval` in milliseconds to automatically save progress while documents are edited. Document updates are "debounced" at this interval. Defaults to `2000`. |
+| `interval`              | Define an `interval` in milliseconds to automatically save progress while documents are edited. Document updates are "debounced" at this interval. Defaults to `800`. |
 
 **Example config with versions, drafts, and autosave enabled:**
 
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ When `autosave` is enabled, all `update` operations within Payload expose a new
 
 #### How autosaves are stored
 
-If we created a new version for each autosave, you'd quickly find a ton of autosaves that clutter up your `_versions` collection within the database. That would be messy quick because `autosave` is typically set to save a document every ~2000ms or so.
+If we created a new version for each autosave, you'd quickly find a ton of autosaves that clutter up your `_versions` collection within the database. That would be messy quick because `autosave` is typically set to save a document at ~800ms intervals.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   Instead of creating a new version each time a document is autosaved, Payload smartly only creates{' '}

examples/auth/next-app/package.json

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
   },
   "dependencies": {
     "escape-html": "^1.0.3",
-    "next": "^13.4.8",
+    "next": "^13.5.1",
     "react": "18.2.0",
     "react-dom": "18.2.0",
     "react-hook-form": "^7.45.1"

examples/auth/next-pages/next.config.js

@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@ const nextConfig = {
   reactStrictMode: true,
   swcMinify: true,
   images: {
-    domains: ['localhost', process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_CMS_URL],
+    domains: ['localhost', process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_PAYLOAD_URL || ''].filter(Boolean),
   },
-};
+}
 
-module.exports = nextConfig;
+module.exports = nextConfig

examples/auth/next-pages/package.json

@@ -10,19 +10,19 @@
   },
   "dependencies": {
     "escape-html": "^1.0.3",
-    "next": "^13.4.8",
+    "next": "^13.5.1",
     "react": "18.2.0",
     "react-dom": "18.2.0",
     "react-hook-form": "^7.34.2"
   },
   "devDependencies": {
     "@next/eslint-plugin-next": "^13.1.6",
+    "@payloadcms/eslint-config": "^0.0.2",
     "@types/node": "18.11.3",
     "@types/react": "^18.2.14",
     "@types/react-dom": "^18.2.6",
     "@typescript-eslint/eslint-plugin": "^5.51.0",
     "@typescript-eslint/parser": "^5.51.0",
-    "@payloadcms/eslint-config": "^0.0.2",
     "eslint": "8.25.0",
     "eslint-config-prettier": "^8.5.0",
     "eslint-plugin-filenames": "^1.3.2",
@@ -31,6 +31,7 @@
     "eslint-plugin-react-hooks": "^4.6.0",
     "eslint-plugin-simple-import-sort": "^10.0.0",
     "prettier": "^2.7.1",
+    "sass": "^1.69.7",
     "slate": "^0.82.0",
     "typescript": "4.8.4"
   }

examples/auth/payload/package.json

@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
     "@payloadcms/db-mongodb": "latest",
     "@payloadcms/richtext-slate": "latest",
     "dotenv": "^8.2.0",
-    "express": "^4.17.1",
+    "express": "^4.19.2",
     "payload": "latest"
   },
   "devDependencies": {

examples/auth/payload/yarn.lock

@@ -2810,6 +2810,11 @@ cookie@0.5.0:
   resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/cookie/-/cookie-0.5.0.tgz#d1f5d71adec6558c58f389987c366aa47e994f8b"
   integrity sha512-YZ3GUyn/o8gfKJlnlX7g7xq4gyO6OSuhGPKaaGssGB2qgDUS0gPgtTvoyZLTt9Ab6dC4hfc9dV5arkvc/OCmrw==
 
+cookie@0.6.0:
+  version "0.6.0"
+  resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/cookie/-/cookie-0.6.0.tgz#2798b04b071b0ecbff0dbb62a505a8efa4e19051"
+  integrity sha512-U71cyTamuh1CRNCfpGY6to28lxvNwPG4Guz/EVjgf3Jmzv0vlDp1atT9eS5dDjMYHucpHbWns6Lwf3BKz6svdw==
+
 copyfiles@^2.4.1:
   version "2.4.1"
   resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/copyfiles/-/copyfiles-2.4.1.tgz#d2dcff60aaad1015f09d0b66e7f0f1c5cd3c5da5"
@@ -3476,13 +3481,14 @@ es-to-primitive@^1.2.1:
     is-date-object "^1.0.1"
     is-symbol "^1.0.2"
 
-es5-ext@^0.10.35, es5-ext@^0.10.46, es5-ext@^0.10.50, es5-ext@^0.10.53, es5-ext@^0.10.61, es5-ext@~0.10.14, es5-ext@~0.10.2, es5-ext@~0.10.46:
-  version "0.10.62"
-  resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/es5-ext/-/es5-ext-0.10.62.tgz#5e6adc19a6da524bf3d1e02bbc8960e5eb49a9a5"
-  integrity sha512-BHLqn0klhEpnOKSrzn/Xsz2UIW8j+cGmo9JLzr8BiUapV8hPL9+FliFqjwr9ngW7jWdnxv6eO+/LqyhJVqgrjA==
+es5-ext@^0.10.35, es5-ext@^0.10.46, es5-ext@^0.10.50, es5-ext@^0.10.53, es5-ext@^0.10.61, es5-ext@^0.10.62, es5-ext@~0.10.14, es5-ext@~0.10.2, es5-ext@~0.10.46:
+  version "0.10.64"
+  resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/es5-ext/-/es5-ext-0.10.64.tgz#12e4ffb48f1ba2ea777f1fcdd1918ef73ea21714"
+  integrity sha512-p2snDhiLaXe6dahss1LddxqEm+SkuDvV8dnIQG0MWjyHpcMNfXKPE+/Cc0y+PhxJX3A4xGNeFCj5oc0BUh6deg==
   dependencies:
     es6-iterator "^2.0.3"
     es6-symbol "^3.1.3"
+    esniff "^2.0.1"
     next-tick "^1.1.0"
 
 es6-iterator@^2.0.3:
@@ -3663,6 +3669,16 @@ eslint@^8.19.0:
     strip-ansi "^6.0.1"
     text-table "^0.2.0"
 
+esniff@^2.0.1:
+  version "2.0.1"
+  resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/esniff/-/esniff-2.0.1.tgz#a4d4b43a5c71c7ec51c51098c1d8a29081f9b308"
+  integrity sha512-kTUIGKQ/mDPFoJ0oVfcmyJn4iBDRptjNVIzwIFR7tqWXdVI9xfA2RMwY/gbSpJG3lkdWNEjLap/NqVHZiJsdfg==
+  dependencies:
+    d "^1.0.1"
+    es5-ext "^0.10.62"
+    event-emitter "^0.3.5"
+    type "^2.7.2"
+
 espree@^9.6.0, espree@^9.6.1:
   version "9.6.1"
   resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/espree/-/espree-9.6.1.tgz#a2a17b8e434690a5432f2f8018ce71d331a48c6f"
@@ -3748,7 +3764,7 @@ express-rate-limit@5.5.1:
   resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/express-rate-limit/-/express-rate-limit-5.5.1.tgz#110c23f6a65dfa96ab468eda95e71697bc6987a2"
   integrity sha512-MTjE2eIbHv5DyfuFz4zLYWxpqVhEhkTiwFGuB74Q9CSou2WHO52nlE5y3Zlg6SIsiYUIPj6ifFxnkPz6O3sIUg==
 
-express@4.18.2, express@^4.17.1:
+express@4.18.2:
   version "4.18.2"
   resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/express/-/express-4.18.2.tgz#3fabe08296e930c796c19e3c516979386ba9fd59"
   integrity sha512-5/PsL6iGPdfQ/lKM1UuielYgv3BUoJfz1aUwU9vHZ+J7gyvwdQXFEBIEIaxeGf0GIcreATNyBExtalisDbuMqQ==
@@ -3785,6 +3801,43 @@ express@4.18.2, express@^4.17.1:
     utils-merge "1.0.1"
     vary "~1.1.2"
 
+express@^4.19.2:
+  version "4.19.2"
+  resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/express/-/express-4.19.2.tgz#e25437827a3aa7f2a827bc8171bbbb664a356465"
+  integrity sha512-5T6nhjsT+EOMzuck8JjBHARTHfMht0POzlA60WV2pMD3gyXw2LZnZ+ueGdNxG+0calOJcWKbpFcuzLZ91YWq9Q==
+  dependencies:
+    accepts "~1.3.8"
+    array-flatten "1.1.1"
+    body-parser "1.20.2"
+    content-disposition "0.5.4"
+    content-type "~1.0.4"
+    cookie "0.6.0"
+    cookie-signature "1.0.6"
+    debug "2.6.9"
+    depd "2.0.0"
+    encodeurl "~1.0.2"
+    escape-html "~1.0.3"
+    etag "~1.8.1"
+    finalhandler "1.2.0"
+    fresh "0.5.2"
+    http-errors "2.0.0"
+    merge-descriptors "1.0.1"
+    methods "~1.1.2"
+    on-finished "2.4.1"
+    parseurl "~1.3.3"
+    path-to-regexp "0.1.7"
+    proxy-addr "~2.0.7"
+    qs "6.11.0"
+    range-parser "~1.2.1"
+    safe-buffer "5.2.1"
+    send "0.18.0"
+    serve-static "1.15.0"
+    setprototypeof "1.2.0"
+    statuses "2.0.1"
+    type-is "~1.6.18"
+    utils-merge "1.0.1"
+    vary "~1.1.2"
+
 ext@^1.1.2:
   version "1.7.0"
   resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/ext/-/ext-1.7.0.tgz#0ea4383c0103d60e70be99e9a7f11027a33c4f5f"
@@ -4508,9 +4561,9 @@ interpret@^2.2.0:
   integrity sha512-Ju0Bz/cEia55xDwUWEa8+olFpCiQoypjnQySseKtmjNrnps3P+xfpUmGr90T7yjlVJmOtybRvPXhKMbHr+fWnw==
 
 ip@^2.0.0:
-  version "2.0.0"
-  resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/ip/-/ip-2.0.0.tgz#4cf4ab182fee2314c75ede1276f8c80b479936da"
-  integrity sha512-WKa+XuLG1A1R0UWhl2+1XQSi+fZWMsYKffMZTTYsiZaUD8k2yDAj5atimTUD2TZkyCkNEeYE5NhFZmupOGtjYQ==
+  version "2.0.1"
+  resolved "https://registry.yarnpkg.com/ip/-/ip-2.0.1.tgz#e8f3595d33a3ea66490204234b77636965307105"
+  integrity sha512-lJUL9imLTNi1ZfXT+DU6rBBdbiKGBuay9B6xGSPVjUeQwaH1RIGqef8RZkUtHioLmSNpPR5M4HVKJGm1j8FWVQ==
 
 ipaddr.js@1.9.1:
   version "1.9.1"

examples/custom-server/README.md

@@ -98,6 +98,13 @@ On boot, a seed script is included to scaffold a basic database for you to use a
 
 > NOTICE: seeding the database is destructive because it drops your current database to populate a fresh one from the seed template. Only run this command if you are starting a new project or can afford to lose your current data.
 
+### Conflicting routes
+
+>In a monorepo when routes are bootstrapped to the same host, they can conflict with Payload's own routes if they have the same name. In our template we've named the Nextjs API routes to `next` to avoid this conflict.
+>
+>This can happen with any other routes conflicting with Payload such as `admin` and we recommend using different names for custom routes.  
+>Alternatively you can also rename Payload's own routes via the [configuration](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview).
+
 ## Production
 
 To run Payload in production, you need to build and serve the Admin panel. To do so, follow these steps:

examples/custom-server/package.json

@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
     "@payloadcms/richtext-slate": "latest",
     "dotenv": "^8.2.0",
     "escape-html": "^1.0.3",
-    "express": "^4.17.1",
+    "express": "^4.19.2",
     "next": "^13.4.8",
     "payload": "latest",
     "react": "^18.2.0",
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
     "eslint-plugin-simple-import-sort": "^10.0.0",
     "nodemon": "^2.0.22",
     "prettier": "^2.7.1",
-    "ts-node": "^10.9.1",
+    "ts-node": "10.9.1",
     "typescript": "^4.8.4"
   }
 }

examples/custom-server/src/app/api/test-get/route.ts

@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-import { NextResponse } from 'next/server'
-
-export async function GET(): Promise<NextResponse> {
-  return NextResponse.json({ success: true })
-}

examples/custom-server/src/app/api/test-post/route.ts

@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-import { NextResponse } from 'next/server'
-
-export async function POST(): Promise<NextResponse> {
-  return NextResponse.json({ success: true })
-}

examples/custom-server/src/app/next/test-get/route.ts

@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+import { NextResponse } from 'next/server'
+
+/**
+ * The Next.js API routes can conflict with Payload's own routes if they share the same path
+ * To avoid this you can customise the path of Payload or the API route of Nextjs as we've done here
+ * See readme: https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-server#conflicting-routes
+ *  */
+export async function GET(): Promise<NextResponse> {
+  return NextResponse.json({ success: true })
+}

examples/custom-server/src/app/next/test-post/route.ts

@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+import { NextResponse } from 'next/server'
+
+/**
+ * The Next.js API routes can conflict with Payload's own routes if they share the same path
+ * To avoid this you can customise the path of Payload or the API route of Nextjs as we've done here
+ * See readme: https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-server#conflicting-routes
+ *  */
+export async function POST(): Promise<NextResponse> {
+  return NextResponse.json({ success: true })
+}

examples/custom-server/src/dotenv.js

@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-module.exports = {
-  config: () => null,
-}

examples/custom-server/src/payload.config.ts

@@ -21,16 +21,6 @@ export default buildConfig({
     components: {
       beforeLogin: [BeforeLogin],
     },
-    webpack: config => ({
-      ...config,
-      resolve: {
-        ...config.resolve,
-        alias: {
-          ...config.resolve.alias,
-          dotenv: path.resolve(__dirname, './dotenv.js'),
-        },
-      },
-    }),
   },
   editor: slateEditor({}),
   db: mongooseAdapter({

examples/custom-server/src/server.ts

@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ const start = async (): Promise<void> => {
     app.listen(PORT, async () => {
       payload.logger.info(`Next.js is now building...`)
       // @ts-expect-error
-      await nextBuild(path.join(__dirname, '../'))
+      await nextBuild(path.join(__dirname, '..'))
       process.exit()
     })
 

examples/db-example/.eslintignore

@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+.tmp
+**/.git
+**/.hg
+**/.pnp.*
+**/.svn
+**/.yarn/**
+**/build
+**/dist/**
+**/node_modules
+**/temp